JP6458307B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a game ball enters a start opening, a special symbol is variably displayed. In the special symbol variable display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the special symbol variable display, a special game with the opening of the big prize opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes the winning gate, variable display of normal symbols is performed. In the normal symbol variable display, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the normal symbol variation display, an auxiliary game is executed with the opening of the variable second starting port as the starting port.

  Here, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a special drawing lottery effect including a variation display of a production symbol is performed in the display area of the image display device 7 when a special symbol variation display is performed. . And, for example, when the normal symbol variation display is started while the special drawing lottery effect is being performed, the normal drawing effect may be started. When the general drawing effect is started, a box B appears in the display area of the image display device 7 where the special drawing lottery effect is performed. Then, the reel L to which a plurality of types of special effect symbols are attached rotates in the box B, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, the special effect symbols appearing from the box B suggest a predetermined item (execution of an auxiliary game with a long opening time or expectation of jackpot).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-039887

  Although the game entertainment is improved by performing such a general drawing effect, the normal drawing effect is always started when the box B appears. Therefore, it is easily understood by the player that the usual drawing effect is executed when the box B appears.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves the effect of the presentation according to the change display of symbols.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention
When the game ball wins the starting area, it is possible to stop display after the first symbol is variably displayed. When the specific first symbol is stopped, the first specific game advantageous to the player is executed. Possible game control means;
When the first symbol is variably displayed, the predetermined effect can be executed after the suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect may be executed on the display unit capable of displaying an image. A game machine comprising a certain production control means,
The starting region includes a variable starting region that can take a closed state and an open state,
The game control means can execute variable display of the second symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a specific display result is derived in the variable display, the game control means includes the second state with the open state of the variable start area. Specific games can be executed,
The production control means includes
After performing the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the second specific game is executed without executing the predetermined effect.
After notifying that the second specific game is executed in the notification effect, the second specific game is executed, and after notifying that the second specific game is not executed in the notification effect, the second 2 The specific game is not executed,
After performing the suggested effect, Ri Kotogaa which none perform the predetermined presentation and the notification effect,
The notification effect is executed in response to the end of the suggestion effect,
In the notification effect, it is derived whether or not the second specific game is executed after the common effect common to the case where the second specific game is executed and the case where the second specific game is not executed. To do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the effect of staging according to the symbol variation display.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows in detail the 2nd big prize apparatus etc. with which the game machine is provided. It is a perspective view which shows the longitudinal cross-section of the unit components provided with the 1st big winning device with which the game machine is provided, and a start winning unit. It is a front view of indicator provided with the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the main control board of the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the sub control board of the same gaming machine. (A) is a table | surface which shows a common figure related random number, (B) is a table | surface which shows a special figure related random number. (A) is a winning determination table, (B) is a winning symbol type determining table, (C) is a normal variation pattern determining table, and (D) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot symbol determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, (C) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (D) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a special figure fixed time determination table. It is a start winning command specific table. It is a special game control table. It is a time-short prescribed number of times determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the background image for normal production modes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the special figure fluctuation effect of reach-less loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example until it becomes reach after the special figure change production starts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in the case where the stop display of the effect symbol which shows a loss from N reach is performed, and the case where the stop display of the effect symbol which shows a jackpot is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches from N reach to L reach or SP reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a holding | maintenance effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding change notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows main production | presentation flows, such as a sign production, the challenge effect to V, and a connection production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a warning effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches, when not rushing into the case where it rushes into the challenge effect from V. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches when the first challenge in a first challenge production succeeds and fails. Specific examples of branching when there is a prize for electric chew after the electric chew launch promotion effect, and when the transitional effect during auxiliary game is performed, and when there is no prize winning for electric chew and the electric chew non-winning effect is performed It is explanatory drawing shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the connection effect during the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the last challenge effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches, when succeeding in the last challenge in last challenge production, and when failing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a VAT launch promotion effect and a small hit game rush effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches, when failing by the last challenge effect and when the temporary stop display and stop display of the effect symbol which shows a loss are performed, and when a revival challenge effect is performed. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a type of precursor effect different from the precursor effect of FIG. 26. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a continuation of the precursor effect of FIG. 34. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of regulation of a precursor effect. It is a time chart showing the specific example explaining the sign effect, the challenge effect to V, and the connection effect. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a main side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process, and is a figure showing the continuation of FIG. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process, and is a figure showing the continuation of FIG. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol fluctuation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of an auxiliary game control process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of jackpot game control processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a small hit game control process. It is a flowchart of distribution device control processing. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 60 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing and represents a continuation of FIG. 59. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, showing a continuation of FIG. 60. It is a flowchart of a process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart of a special figure variation production start process. It is a flowchart of a predecessor effect gasset execution determination process. It is a flowchart of a pending | holding icon shift process. It is a flowchart of a warning effect regulation process. It is a flowchart of a reduced screen display end determination process. It is a flowchart of a usual figure change effect determination process. It is a flowchart of an auxiliary game start process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of completion | finish of an auxiliary game. It is a flowchart of a warning effect regulation release determination process. It is a pending change notice determination table when the prior determination result is a big hit change. It is a pending change notice determination table when the prior determination result is a small hit fluctuation. It is a pending | holding change notice determination table in case a prior determination result is SP reach loss variation. It is a pending | holding change notice determination table in case a prior determination result is L reach loss fluctuation. It is a pending | holding change notice determination table in case a prior determination result is N reach loss variation. It is a pending change notice determination table when the prior determination result is a normal loss variation. It is a special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table for special figure 2 fluctuation display in normal production mode. It is a sign production execution execution determination table. It is a pending change notice type determination table. It is a maintenance change sign production gasset execution determination table. It is a sign production type determination table. It is a first challenge production pattern determination table.

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of gaming machine A pachinko gaming machine 1 which is a first embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the horizontal and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the horizontal and vertical directions (in front view) for a player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a direction approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the backward direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. The direction from the person approaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a gaming board mounting frame 51 to which the gaming board 2 is mounted, and a front frame 53 that is rotatably supported by the gaming board mounting frame 51. The front frame 53 can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 51. A transparent glass plate (not shown) is attached to the front frame 53. When the front frame 53 is closed, the game board 2 attached to the game board attachment frame 51 and the glass plate face each other. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game store, the player in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 passes through the glass plate to the gaming area 3 formed on the gaming board 2 as shown in FIG. It can be visually recognized. A transparent synthetic resin plate or the like may be used instead of the glass plate. What is necessary is just to be able to visually recognize the game area 3 from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A handle 60 that can be rotated to launch a game ball is provided at the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 53. The amount (rotation angle) by which the handle 60 is operated corresponds to the magnitude (launch strength) of the force (the amount driven by the launching device 112, which will be described later) to be applied to the game ball to launch the game ball. It is attached. Accordingly, the game ball is launched at a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 60. In the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 53, a batting ball supply tray (so-called “upper plate”) 61 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 60 and game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 61 are stored. And a surplus ball receiving tray 62 (so-called “lower tray”).

  On the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 61, an effect button 63 that can be pressed downward is provided. Speakers 67 that can output sound are provided on the left and right sides of the front upper portion of the front frame 53, respectively. A frame lamp 66 capable of emitting light is provided on the left side of the front middle portion of the front frame 53.

  Next, the game board 2 and the like will be described. The game board 2 is composed of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A center decoration body 10 having a substantially circular ring shape when viewed from the front and provided with an opening 10A having a generally circular shape when viewed from the front is provided in the approximate center of the game board 2.

  Further, an image display device 7 capable of displaying an image is provided on the back side of the game board 2. An operable board movable body 15 </ b> K is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 7. The board movable body 15 </ b> K constitutes the board movable device 15. In the first embodiment, the image display device 7 is configured by a 3D liquid crystal display. When the panel movable body 15K is in the standby state (when waiting in the initial position), most of the panel movable body 15K is held so as to be visible from the upper end of the opening 10A of the center decorative body 10 as shown in FIG. Yes. At this time, the upper end portion of the display portion 7a of the image display device 7 is covered with a visually recognizable portion of the movable panel body 15K. In other words, the display unit 7 a is visible from a portion of the opening 10 </ b> A of the center decorative body 10 that is not covered with the movable panel body 15 </ b> K. The board movable body 15K can be lowered (moved downward) from the initial position (standby state) to a substantially center position of the display unit 7a in a front view, and stopped at that position. In this case, the display unit 7a is covered with the board movable body 15K in a larger area than when the board movable body 15K is in the standby state.

  A rail member 4 is provided on the front surface of the game board 2. A game area 3 surrounded by a rail member 4 and a center decorative body 10 is formed on the front surface of the game board 2. In other words, the front surface of the game board 2 is divided into the game area 3 and other areas by the rail member 4 and the center decoration body 10. The game area 3 is an area where a game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 can flow down, and is provided for playing a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game area 3, a large number of game nails (a large number of small white circles in the game area 3 of FIG. 1) are projected. The game nail enters the game area 3 and flows down the game area 3 into a first start port 20, a second start port 22, a general winning port 27, a gate 28 (the left gate 281 and the right gate). 282), a route for appropriately guiding to the first big prize opening 30, the second big prize opening 32, and the like is configured.

  In the game area 3, immediately below the center decorative body 10, a first start winning device 21 having a first start port 20 and a second start winning device (so-called “electric chew”) having a second start port 22 are formed. ) 23 is provided. The first start winning device 21 is arranged at the upper end portion of the substantially center in the left-right direction of the start winning device unit SU. The second start winning device 23 is arranged below the first start winning device 21, in other words, substantially at the lower center of the start winning device unit SU.

  The first start winning device 21 is stationary. Therefore, the first start port 20 is constant (invariable) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. The winning of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1”) (acquisition and determination of a special figure 1 related random number described later: hereinafter “special figure 1 lottery”) And the variable display shown in FIG. When a game ball wins the first start port 20, a predetermined number (four in the first embodiment) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball.

  The electric chew 23 includes an operable electric chew opening / closing member 23K. The electric chew opening / closing member 23K is a tongue-shaped piece having a substantially vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and is housed in the second starting port 22 in a normal closed state. Specifically, the front end of the electric chew opening / closing member 23 </ b> K is housed inside the second start port 22 so that the front end thereof substantially coincides with the game area 3 (the surface of the game board 2). The electric chew opening / closing member 23K can move (back and forth) in the front-rear direction from the housed state. When the electric chew opening / closing member 23K moves forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 23K protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 3 so that the flowing game ball can be received and called into the second starting port 22. Thus, the state in which the electric chew opening / closing member 23K is in the protruding state is also referred to as an “open state”, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 22 only when it is in the open state. On the other hand, the state in which the electric chew opening / closing member 23K is housed in the second start port 22 is also referred to as a “closed state”. As described above, the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 23K opens and closes the second start port 22.

  The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 is a lottery of a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “Special Figure 2”) (acquisition and determination of a special figure 2 related random number to be described later: hereinafter, “Special Figure 2 lottery”) ) And the variable display of Special Figure 2. When a game ball wins the second start port 22, a predetermined number (4 in the first embodiment) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball.

  Further, one general winning port 27 is provided on the left side of the first start winning device 21 in the game area 3. Further, one general winning opening 27 is provided on the right side of the electric chew 23. When the game balls win the general winning opening 27, a predetermined number (three in the first embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Further, a left gate 281 and a right gate 282 through which a game ball can pass are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 7 in front view. Hereinafter, the left gate 281 and the right gate 282 are collectively referred to as “gate 28”. When the game ball passes through the gate 28, a lottery of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal diagram”) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 23 (execution of an auxiliary game) (ie, determination as acquisition of a normal symbol random number) And it is a trigger for variable display of usual.

  In addition, a normal AT unit TU including a first grand prize winning device 31 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal AT 31”) in which a first big prize winning opening 30 is formed is provided on the right side of the start winning prize unit SU in the game area 3. It has been. In addition, a game area 3 in which a game ball can flow down is formed in a part (upper part) of the normal AT unit TU. The game area 3 formed in the normal AT unit TU is also provided with a flow path 37 capable of rolling the game ball along its shape. The flow path 37 is composed of an inclined surface that descends to the left as a whole.

  The first grand prize winning device 31 is provided on the lower right side of the right gate 282 below the image display device 7 in front of the electric chew 23, in other words, diagonally upward. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an operable normal AT opening / closing member 31K. The normal AT opening / closing member 31K is formed of a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate in a plan view. In a normal closed state, the AT open / close member 31K protrudes vertically from the game area 3 formed in the normal AT unit TU, and closes the first grand prize opening 30 while playing the game. The central part of the flow path 37 in which the sphere can flow down is formed. A right inclined surface 371 upstream of the normal AT opening / closing member 31K is formed on the right side of the normal AT opening / closing member 31K in the flow path 37, and a normal AT opening is provided on the left side of the normal AT opening / closing member 31K in the flow path 37. A left inclined surface 372 is formed on the downstream side of the opening / closing member 31K.

  Usually, the AT opening / closing member 31K can move backward from the protruding state. When the normal AT opening / closing member 31K moves rearward, the front end of the normal AT opening / closing member 31 substantially coincides with the game area 3 (the surface of the start winning device unit SU), and the entire normal AT opening / closing member 31K is located inside the start winning device unit SU. Stored. When the normal AT opening / closing member 31K is stored, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened, so that the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30. In this way, the normal AT opening / closing member 31K being in the retracted state is also referred to as an “open state”, and it is possible to enter the game ball into the first big prize opening 30 only when it is in the open state. On the other hand, a state in which the normal AT opening / closing member 31K protrudes from the game area 3 is also referred to as a “closed state”. In this way, the first big prize opening 30 is opened and closed by the operation of the normal AT opening / closing member 31K. When a game ball wins the first grand prize opening 30, a predetermined number (14 in the first embodiment) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball.

  In the lower left of the right gate 282 in the game area 3, a second big prize device 33 (hereinafter also referred to as “VAT 33”) in which a second big prize opening 32 is formed is provided. The second big prize winning device 33 includes an operable VAT opening / closing member 33K. The VAT opening / closing member 33K is a rod-like body having a blade-like shape when viewed from the front, and is normally held in a posture of approximately 90 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction and closes the second grand prize winning opening 32. The VAT opening / closing member 33K rotates about 70 degrees around the lower end so that the upper end falls to the right side, and can be in the open state. Only when the VAT opening / closing member 33K is in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second big prize opening 32. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening / closing member 33K closes the second big prize opening 32 is also referred to as a “closed state”. Thus, the second big prize opening 32 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening and closing member 33K. When a game ball wins the second big prize opening 32, a predetermined number (14 in the first embodiment) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball.

  Here, the second grand prize winning device 33 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Inside the second grand prize winning device 33, there is provided a gate-like second big prize winning port sensor 32a capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second grand prize winning port 32 and allowing the game ball to pass downward. It has been.

  A specific area 34 and a non-specific area 35 through which game balls can pass (enter) are provided in the downstream area of the second big prize opening sensor 32a. The game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening sensor 32 a are distributed to the specific area 34 or the non-specific area 35 by the distribution device 36. The distribution device 36 includes a distribution member 36K made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a distribution solenoid 36S that drives the distribution member 36K. The distribution member 36K is configured to be rotatable between a state held in the vertical direction and a state held in the horizontal direction by driving the distribution solenoid 36S.

  When the distribution solenoid 36S is not energized, the distribution member 36K is in the first state that prevents the game ball from passing into the specific area 34 (passage prevention state: the distribution member 36K in FIG. 2 is tilted to the left). It is in. When the sorting member 36K is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second grand prize opening 32 cannot pass through the specific area 34 after passing through the second big prize port sensor 32a. The non-specific region 35 is passed. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second grand prize opening 32 to the non-specific area 35 is referred to as a first route.

  On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 36S is energized, the distribution member 36K is in a second state in which the game ball is allowed to pass (enter) the specific area 34 (passable state: the distribution member 36K in FIG. In a tilted state). When the sorting member 36K is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big prize opening 32 can easily pass through the specific area 34 after passing through the second big prize opening sensor 32a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second prize winning opening 32 to the specific area 34 is referred to as a second route.

  Basically, the sorting member 36K is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is a normal state of the sorting member 36K. And only at the opening of the small hit game which will be described later, the distribution solenoid 36S is energized and can be changed to the second state.

  The specific area 34 and the non-specific area 35 are provided with a specific area sensor 34a and a non-specific area sensor 35a that detect game balls that have passed (entered) the areas 34 and 35 and pass the game balls downward. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball through the specific area 34 (entry into the specific area 34) triggers the execution of the jackpot game described later. That is, it can be said that the big hit lottery is also performed based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 34, and the passage of the game ball through the specific area 34 can be regarded as a “hit win”. Winning a jackpot in the first special drawing lottery or the second special drawing lottery described above and stopping and displaying a jackpot symbol, which will be described later, is referred to as “type 1 big hit”, and passing a game ball through the specific area 34 is “2”. It is called "special hit." Note that “type 1 big hit” is also called “direct hit big hit”.

  In addition, two out ports 29 for discharging game balls that have been driven into the game region 3 but have not won any of the winning ports to the outside of the game region 3 are provided at the substantially lowermost part of the game region 3. Yes.

  By the way, the game area 3 in which the game ball can flow can be divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. it can. The operation mode of the handle 60 for firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is referred to as “left-handed”. On the other hand, an operation mode of the handle 60 for firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is referred to as “right-handed”. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the flow path through which the game ball can flow when the game ball is fired with the left strike is referred to as a first flow path R1, and when the game ball is fired with the right strike, the game ball flows down. A possible flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also configured by a number of game nails.

  A first start port 20, a left gate 281 and one general winning port 27 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting port 20, the left gate 281 or the general winning port 27 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by left-handed. it can. On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second start port 22, a right gate 282, a first grand prize port 30, and a second grand prize port 32 are provided. Therefore, the player launches the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the right side, thereby passing the right gate 282, the second starting port 22, the first big winning port 30, or the first It is possible to aim for winning in the two major winning openings 32.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the behavior of the game balls fired by left-handed and right-handed shots in the vicinity of the first start opening 20, the second start opening 22, and the first big winning opening 30 will be described in detail. . In the start winning device unit SU including the first start winning device 21 and the like, a game area 3 in which a game ball can flow down is formed as in the normal AT unit TU. And between the 1st starting port 20 and the 2nd starting port 22 in the game area | region 3, the entrance prevention part EC which suppresses the winning to the 2nd starting port 22 of the game ball which flowed down 1st flow path R1. Is provided. The entrance restraining part EC is constituted by a wall part arranged substantially perpendicular to the game area 3, and is inclined downward from the right to the left from the right side of the first starting port 20 to the left side of the second starting port 22. It is formed in a shape. The right end of the entrance suppression unit EC is formed at a position that is a predetermined distance (for example, four game balls) approximately to the right side from the first start port 20, and the left end of the entrance suppression unit EC is the second start port 22. Is formed at a position with a predetermined distance (for example, four game balls) on the left side from the front. Therefore, the first start port 20 and the second start port 22 are separated from each other by the entrance suppression unit EC.

  The upper surface ECa of the entrance suppression unit EC is inclined downward from right to left. Therefore, the upper surface ECa of the ball entry suppression unit EC functions as a guide surface that guides the game ball B1 flowing down the right side of the first start port 20 to the left side of the second start port 22. The game ball guided to the left side of the second start port 22 is guided and discharged to the out port 29 (see FIG. 1) arranged in the vicinity of the entrance suppression unit EC. In addition, when the game ball B2 flowing down the left side of the first start port 20 reaches the upper surface ECa of the entrance suppression unit EC, the game ball B2 rolls along the upper surface ECa, is guided to the out port 29, and is discharged. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path R1 does not basically enter the second start port 22. That is, the entry of the left-handed game ball into the second start port 22 is restricted. In addition, it can be said that the entrance suppression part EC forms the 1st guidance path GP1 which guides so that the game ball which flowed down 1st flow path R1 may not enter the 2nd starting port 22. FIG.

  In addition, an opening SUa that opens to the right is provided below the ball entry suppressing portion EC in the start winning device unit SU. The opening SUa is connected to a passage TP formed on the right side of the start winning device unit SU, and the opening SUa serves as an entrance of the second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second start port 22. Yes. Therefore, the game ball B3 flowing down the passage TP can be awarded to the second starting port 22. As a result, even if it is a game ball flowing down the first flow path R1, when it reaches the right passage TP from the right end portion of the ball entry suppression unit EC by bouncing, etc., it is possible to win the second starting port 22. it can. That is, in the first embodiment, although the start winning device unit SU is provided with the ball entry suppressing unit EC, the possibility that the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 wins the second start port 22 is completely eliminated. I don't mean.

  Further, the normal AT unit TU is formed with a connecting portion DUa that can guide the game ball B4 that rolls in the flow path 37 to the opening SUa from the downstream end of the flow path 37. Therefore, it is possible to win the game ball B4 flowing down the second flow path R2 through the connecting portion DUa to the second starting port 22.

  Further, a general winning opening 27 is provided below the opening SUa in the start winning device unit SU. Therefore, when the game ball B3 or the game ball B4 does not enter the opening SUa, there is a possibility of winning the general winning port 27. As described above, since the start winning device unit SU is provided with the general winning opening 27, even if the number of winning balls for winning in the second starting opening 22 is reduced, the award based on winning in the general winning opening 27 is obtained. The sphere makes it possible to prevent the base in the short time state described later from becoming too low.

  If the game ball B3 or the game ball B4 does not enter the opening SUa of the start winning device unit SU or the general winning port 27, it is guided to the out port 29 and discharged.

  And in 1st Embodiment, 1st flow path R1 and 2nd flow path R2 merge in each downstream part. A channel that is common to the first channel R1 and the second channel R2 is referred to as a confluence portion GR. The second start port 22 (electrical chute 23), the general winning port 27, and the out port 29 are arranged in the junction GR.

  In addition, a display device 40 is arranged in the lower right (a part other than the game area 3) of the game area 3 formed on the front surface of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. 4, the display group 40 includes a special figure 1 display 411 that can variably display the special figure 1, a special figure 2 display 412 that can variably display the special figure 2, and A universal map display 42 for variably displaying the universal map is included. In addition, the display unit 40 can display a special figure 1 hold number (U1: the number of the variable figure of the special figure 1 displayed by the special figure 1 display unit 411 being held) which will be described later. And a special figure 2 hold display 432 that can display a special figure 2 hold number (U2: the number of the variable display of the special figure 2 by the special figure 2 display 412 being held) to be described later. Yes.

  The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is performed in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is performed in response to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22. In the following description, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as special figure, and special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as special figure lottery. Further, the special figure display 411 and the special figure 2 display 412 are collectively referred to as a special figure display 41. Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 431 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 432 are collectively referred to as a special figure hold indicator 43.

  The special figure variable display notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the special figure variable display, the special figure is variably displayed and then stopped. The special figure that is displayed in a stopped state (the special figure that is derived and displayed as the stop special figure and the display result of the variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of types of special figures. If the stop special figure is a predetermined special figure (special figure of a specific stop mode: a jackpot symbol or a small bonus symbol described later), it depends on the type of the particular special figure that is stopped. A special game (small hit game and big hit game) is performed in which the special winning openings 30, 32 are opened in an open mode.

  The special figure indicator 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special figure corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery according to its lighting mode. For example, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later), the special chart indicator 41 displays “□□ ■■ □□ ■■” (□: lit, ■ : The jackpot symbol composed of the lighting of the first, second, fifth and sixth LEDs from the left is displayed. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a small bonus, the special symbol display 41 “□ ■■■■■■■”, which is composed of only the leftmost LED, is turned on. Is displayed. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, a special symbol display 41 “■■■■■■■ □” is displayed, indicating a loss pattern consisting of only the rightmost LED. To do. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all LEDs may be turned off as a lost pattern.

  In the variable display of the special figure, the fluctuation display of the special figure is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variation display mode of the special figure is a mode in which each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right, for example. In addition, the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted display in a specific mode).

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins (enters) the first start port 20 or the second start port 22, various random numbers (determination information) for performing special drawing lottery or the like may be acquired. is there. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 (see FIG. 5) as special figure reservation. In the following, various random numbers acquired when a game ball wins (wins) the first starting port 20 are referred to as “special figure 1 related random numbers”, and the game ball wins the second starting port 22. Various random numbers obtained by (entering) are called “special figure 2 related random numbers”. Here, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 storage unit 851 (see FIG. 5) in the special figure storage unit 85 as a special figure 1 storage. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 storage unit 852 (see FIG. 5) in the special figure storage unit 85 as the special figure 2 storage. The number of special figure 1 holds that can be stored in the special figure 1 storage unit 851 (number of special figures 1) and the number of special figures 2 that can be stored in the special figure 2 storage part 852 (number of special figures 2) Has an upper limit. In the first embodiment, the upper limit value of the special figure 1 hold number is set to “4”, and the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold number is set to “1”. In the following, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are collectively referred to as “special figure hold”, and the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are collectively referred to as “special figure hold number”. The special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 2 related random numbers are collectively referred to as “special figure related random numbers”.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display of the special figure is not performed immediately after the game ball wins the first start opening 20 or the second start opening 22, the variable display of the special figure is being executed. If there is a prize during the execution of the big hit game, the variable display of the special figure for the prize (or the right of special figure lottery) can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when variable display of the special figure based on the special figure hold becomes possible. In other words, the special figure reservation means that a special figure related random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold is determined, and variable display of the special figure for indicating the determination result is executed.

  Then, the special figure hold number is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 431 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 432 is composed of four LEDs, and displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LED for the number of special figure hold.

  Further, the variable display of the normal map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the stop map is displayed after the normal map is changed and displayed. A general map that is displayed in a stopped state (a general map that is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display or a variable display) is one common map selected from a plurality of types of general maps by a general drawing lottery. When the stop-displayed general symbol is a predetermined specific general symbol (a general symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a winning symbol), in an open mode according to the current gaming state and the type of winning symbol An auxiliary game in which the second starting port 22 (electrical chew 23) is opened is performed.

  The universal map indicator 42 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays a universal map corresponding to the result of the universal map lottery according to the lighting state. When the result of the general drawing lottery is a win, the general symbol display 42 displays a winning symbol constituted by lighting of both LEDs such as “□□” (□: lit, ■: unlit). When the result of the regular drawing lottery is lost, a lost symbol constituted by lighting of only the right LED, such as “■ □”, is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a loss pattern. In addition, the lighting aspect of LED corresponding to the result of a general drawing lottery is not limited, It can set suitably.

  Further, the usual fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time before the usual figure is stopped and displayed. The usual variable display mode is a mode in which both LEDs are alternately lit in the first embodiment. In addition, the mode of the usual variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink simultaneously if each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode). .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a normal symbol random number (determination information) for performing a normal drawing lottery may be acquired. In the following, the normal symbol random number acquired by the game ball passing through the gate 28 is also referred to as “common symbol related random number”.

2. Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a special drawing lottery, a special display variable display, a jackpot game, a game state setting which will be described later, a general drawing lottery, a variable display of a general drawing, an auxiliary game, etc. Main control board 80 for controlling game profits (game progress), and game effects according to the progress of the game by the main control board 80 (special figure fluctuation effect, hold effect, jackpot game effect, general figure change effect, auxiliary game effect) ), A sub-control board 90 that performs control related to effects such as an operation promotion effect that prompts an operation during a period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is effective (operation effective period), and control related to payout of a game ball. A payout control board 110 and the like are further provided on the back side of the image display device 7 of the game board 2. The main control board 80 is positioned as a game control unit that controls the game, and the sub control board 90 is an effect control unit that controls the effect together with the image control board 100, the lamp control circuit 107, and the audio control circuit 106, which will be described later. Can be positioned. The production control unit includes at least a sub-control board 90 and uses a production means (image display device 7, panel movable device 15, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, etc.), a game production, a customer waiting production, and an operation. It is sufficient if the promotion effect can be controlled.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a power supply board 160. The power supply board 160 supplies power to the main control board 80, the sub control board 90, and the payout control board 110, and supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. A backup power supply circuit 161 is provided on the power supply board 160. The backup power supply circuit 161 supplies power to a RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and a RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 described later when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 is retained even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. A power switch 165 is connected to the power board 160. By turning on / off the power switch 165, turning on / off the power is switched. A backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 may be provided on the main control board 80, or a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 may be provided on the sub control board 90.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM 83 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 82 that executes programs stored in the ROM 83, and input / output of data and signals. An I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 88 is included.

  The ROM 83 stores a program for performing a main control main process and a main timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The ROM 83 also includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a small bonus symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a special figure determination time determination table, a start winning command specification table, a special, which will be described later. A game control table, a short time prescribed number determination table, a winning determination table, a winning symbol type determination table, a universal variation pattern determination table, an auxiliary game control table, and the like are stored. The ROM 83 may be externally attached. Further, the RAM 84 is provided with the above-described special figure storage unit 85 and the like.

  Further, a RAM clear switch 89 for causing the CPU 82 to clear information stored in the RAM 84 is mounted on the main control board 80.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the main control board 80. The main control board 80 outputs signals to various solenoids.

  The various sensors connected to the main control board 80 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 22a, a general winning port sensor 27a, a left gate sensor 281a, a right gate sensor 282a, and a first grand winning port. A sensor 30a, a second big prize opening sensor 32a, a specific area sensor 34a, and a non-specific area sensor 35a are included.

  The first start port sensor 20 a detects a game ball that has won the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 22 a detects a game ball won in the second start port 22. The general winning opening sensor 27 a detects a game ball won in the general winning opening 27. The left gate sensor 281a is provided in the left gate 281 and detects a game ball that has passed through the left gate 281. The right gate sensor 282a is provided in the right gate 282 and detects a game ball that has passed through the right gate 282. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a detects a game ball won in the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 32 a detects a game ball won in the second big prize opening 32. The specific area sensor 34a detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 34 (entered into the specific area 34). The non-specific area sensor 35a detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 35 (entered into the non-specific area 35). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal corresponding to the detected content to the main control board 80.

  The various solenoids connected to the main control board 80 include an electric chew solenoid 23S, a first big prize opening solenoid 31S, a second big prize opening solenoid 33S, and a distribution solenoid 36S. The electric chew solenoid 23S drives the electric chew opening / closing member 23K of the electric chew 23. The first big prize opening solenoid 31S drives the normal AT opening / closing member 31K of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 33S drives the VAT opening / closing member 33K of the second big prize winning device 33. The sorting solenoid 36S drives the sorting member 36K of the sorting device 36.

  Further, the display 40 (a special display 41, a general display 42, and a special figure holding display 43) is connected to the main control board 80. Display control of these indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. On the payout control board 110, a ball lending device 120, a ball lending device 130 and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and lending a ball based on information such as an inserted prepaid card are possible. And the launching device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

  The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 or a signal from the connected card unit 135 to pay out a prize ball. The ball rental motor 131 of the ball rental dispensing device 130 is driven to pay out the ball rental. The prize ball to be paid out is detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. In addition, the paid-out lending ball is detected by a lending sensor 132 for counting.

  Further, the handle 60 is provided with a touch switch 114 that can detect contact of a person such as a player with the handle 60. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects contact of the player with the handle 60 and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 110. In addition, a launch volume knob 115 capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 60 is connected to the handle 60. The launching device 112 drives the launching motor 113 so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 60 detected by the launch volume knob 115. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, one gaming ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds in a state where the rotation operation to the handle 60 is maintained.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands including information related to the game to the sub-control board 90 as the game progresses. Based on various commands sent from the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90 can grasp the progress of the game by the main control board 80 (game control content). The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  As shown in FIG. 6, an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 91 for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling effects as the game progresses through the main control board 80, a RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 92 that executes a program stored in the ROM 93. An I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 98 for inputting and outputting data and signals is included.

  The ROM 93 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the ROM 93 includes a hold change notice determination table, a stop symbol determination table, a special figure variation effect pattern determination table, a precursor effect gasse execution determination table, a hold change notice type determination table, a maintenance change sign effect gasset execution determination table, which will be described later. A precursor effect type determination table, a first challenge effect pattern determination table, and the like are stored. The ROM 93 may be externally attached.

  In addition, a real time clock (RTC) 99 is mounted on the sub control board 90. The RTC 99 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 99 operates with power when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown). When the power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power board 160 It operates with the power supplied from the backup power supply circuit 161 provided. For this reason, the RTC 99 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not turned on. Note that a backup power supply circuit for the RTC 99 may be provided on the sub-control board 90. As the backup power supply circuit, a circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (button battery or the like) can be employed.

  An image control board 100 is connected to the sub control board 90. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 sends the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to the image display device 7. Display control is performed. The connection between the sub control board 90 and the image control board 100 allows both transmission of signals from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100 and transmission of signals from the image control board 100 to the sub control board 90. Two-way communication connection.

  The image control board 100 includes a control ROM 103 that stores a program for image control, a control RAM 104 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 102 that executes the program stored in the control ROM 103. The image control board 100 also includes a CGROM 143 storing image data displayed on the image display device 7, a VRAM 144 used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 143, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142. It has. Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured as one chip. In the CGROM 143, for example, image data for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 7 (still image data or moving image data, specifically, a character, an item, a figure, a character, a number, a symbol, etc. And image data such as background images) are stored.

  The VDP 142 reads out image data from the CGROM 143 according to a display list created by the CPU 102 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 and develops the image data in a development area in the VRAM 144. Then, the developed image data is appropriately combined to draw an image in the frame buffer in the VRAM 144. The image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 7 as an RGB signal. Thereby, various effect images are displayed on the display unit 7a.

  The display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

  Based on the command received from the main control board 80, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control circuit 106. Is output.

  Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. Note that the audio control circuit 106 may be a substrate and a CPU may be mounted. In this case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, audio data may be stored in the control ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  Further, the sub-control board 90 is connected to various switches serving as an input unit, various solenoids serving as a drive source, and motors via a predetermined relay board (not shown). The sub control board 90 receives signals output from various switches. The sub-control board 90 outputs signals to various solenoids and motors.

  The various switches connected to the sub-control board 90 include an effect button detection switch 63a. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button detection switch 63a detects that it has been operated, the effect button detection switch 63a outputs a signal corresponding to the detected content to the sub-control board 90.

  Various solenoids connected to the sub-control board 90 include a panel movable body solenoid 15S. The panel movable body solenoid 15S drives and operates the panel movable body 15K. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the movable board body 15 </ b> K, and controls the operation of the movable board body 15 </ b> K via the lamp control circuit 107. The panel movable device 15 is configured by the panel movable body 15K and the panel movable body solenoid 15S.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of the frame lamp 66 and the like via the lamp control circuit 107 based on a command received from the main control board 80 or the like. More specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinction and light emission color, or lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66, and the frame lamp 66 is controlled according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

  The CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 107 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may execute the lighting control of the frame lamp 66 and the like and the operation control of the panel movable body 15K. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Description of Game by Main Control Board 80 Next, a game played by the main control board 80 will be described. First of all, I will explain the game related to the usual figure. When the launched game ball passes through the gate 28, the main control board 80 performs a lottery drawing on the condition that the usual variable display or the auxiliary game is not performed. When the main drawing circuit lottery is performed, the main drawing display 42 performs variable display of the normal drawing (stop display after the variable display is performed) on the general drawing display 42. Here, there are a winning symbol and a lost symbol in the usual symbols to be stopped and displayed. In addition, the losing symbol of the ordinary figure is also referred to as “losing ordinary figure” in order to distinguish it from the losing symbol of the special figure described later. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 28 ends. On the other hand, when the lost map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to the passage of the gate 28 is ended. Further, in the following, passing of the game ball through the gate 28 when the usual variable display or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as “establishment of a general variable start condition”.

  When performing such a series of games (general drawing lottery, variable diagram variable display, auxiliary game), the main control board 80 acquires a general diagram related random number when the general diagram variation start condition is satisfied. As shown in FIG. 7A, the common symbol related random numbers to be acquired include a normal symbol random number and a winning symbol type random number. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for making a hit determination. The winning symbol type random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the winning symbol type. Each random number has an appropriate range. Specifically, the range of normal symbol random numbers is 0-255. The range of the winning symbol type random number is 0 to 65535.

  Next, each determination performed using the common figure related random numbers will be described. First, the hit determination will be described. The winning determination is a determination for determining whether or not to win (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using the winning determination table shown in FIG. In the winning determination table, normal symbol random number determination values (ordinary symbol random number determining values) are assigned to the winning and losing results of the winning determination. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table, and determines whether or not it is a hit or a lose. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, basically, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the usual figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is lost, basically, the lost map is stopped and displayed with variable display of the normal map.

  Next, the winning symbol type determination will be described. The winning symbol type determination is a determination for determining the type of winning symbol (winning symbol type) using the winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. The winning symbol type is associated with the winning component, in other words, a winning component constituted by a gaming privilege or the like given to the player. The winning content (winning component) associated with the winning symbol type will be described later.

  In the winning symbol type determination table, the winning symbol type random number determination value (winning symbol type random number determining value) is distributed to the winning symbol type which is the result of the winning symbol type determination. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired winning symbol type random number with the winning symbol type determination table to determine the type of winning symbol. As shown in FIG. 8 (B), three types of winning symbols of winning symbol A to winning symbol C are provided as winning symbols.

  Note that the winning probability and the distribution rate (%) of the winning symbol type are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 8A to 8B, and can be set as appropriate. The types of winning symbols are not limited to the three types of winning symbols shown in FIGS. 8A to 8B, and can be set as appropriate. For example, more or less than three types of winning symbols may be associated with the winning symbol type random number determination value.

  Next, normal pattern determination (general pattern change pattern determination) will be described. The common map variation pattern determination is a determination for determining a common map variation pattern using the general diagram variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The normal map variation pattern is identification information related to a predetermined item related to a normal map change display such as a normal map change time. The normal fluctuation pattern includes the hit detection result in addition to the normal fluctuation time.

  The normal variation pattern determination table is associated with a gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state). In other words, the common figure fluctuation pattern judgment table includes a common figure fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time-short ordinary figure fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in a non-temporal state and a normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table (in a short-time state) ( There is a short time normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table).

  Each normal pattern variation pattern determination table stores one general pattern variation pattern, which is a result of the general pattern variation pattern determination, for each normal symbol to be stopped. That is, in the non-time-short state, the main control board 80 determines that the normal pattern variation display when the lost normal symbol (lost common symbol) is stopped and displayed is the normal diagram variation pattern FHP1, and the winning symbol A is stopped and displayed. When the normal pattern change display is determined, the normal pattern change pattern FHP2 is determined, and when the win symbol B is stopped and displayed, the general pattern change display is determined as the normal pattern change pattern FHP3 and the win symbol C is stopped and displayed. The normal map fluctuation display is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern FHP4. In the short time state, the main control board 80 determines the normal figure fluctuation display when the lost map is stopped to be displayed as the common figure fluctuation pattern FHP5, and the normal figure fluctuation display when the winning symbol A is stopped and displayed. Is determined to be the normal pattern variation pattern FHP6, and the normal pattern variation display when the winning symbol B is stopped and displayed is determined to be the general symbol variation pattern FHP7, and the normal symbol variation display when the winning symbol C is stopped and displayed. It is determined as the usual map variation pattern FHP8. The normal map change time associated with the normal map change patterns FHP1 and FHP4 to FHP8 is 1 second, the normal map change time associated with the general map change pattern FHP2 is 30 seconds, and the normal map change pattern FHP3 The associated normal map change time is 25 seconds. The general map change display of the normal map change time associated with the normal map change pattern determined in this determination is performed by the general map display 42.

  Thus, the variable display of the general map is performed on the general map display 42 by performing the hit determination, the hit symbol type determination, and the normal pattern variation pattern determination. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of the common symbol lottery) in the variable display of the normal symbol, an auxiliary game corresponding to the type of the winning symbol is executed.

  In the auxiliary game, the opening and closing of the electric chew 23 and the auxiliary game start, in other words, the opening of the electric chow 23 for the first time is started after the winning symbol stop display is performed for a predetermined time. The opening is held until the electric chew 23 is kept closed, and the ending is held until the auxiliary game is finished after the final opening of the electric chew 23 is finished.

  The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game constituent elements), that is, the winning content includes the number of times the electric tuner 23 is opened, the opening time for each opening, the opening time (opening time: OP time), and the ending time Various elements such as (ending time: ED time) are included. Each of these elements is associated with a gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state) and a winning symbol type. The main control board 80 controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 8D based on the game state (non-time-short state / time-short state) and the winning symbol type. The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state (non-short-time state / short-time state) and the winning symbol type. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Therefore, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the main control board 80 executes an auxiliary game according to the gaming state and the winning symbol. Here, the auxiliary game according to the game state will be described.

  In the auxiliary game associated with the winning symbol A in the non-time-short state, the electric chew 23 is released once after the opening of 6.00 seconds. The opening time at this time is 5.00 seconds. Then, after the electric chew 23 is released, the auxiliary game is finished through an ending of 0.008 seconds. Therefore, when this auxiliary game is executed, it is easy to win the game ball in the electric chew 23. In the following, the auxiliary game associated with the winning symbol A in the non-time-short state is also referred to as “long open auxiliary game”.

  In the auxiliary game associated with the winning symbol B and the winning symbol C in the non-time-short state, the electric chew 23 is released once after the opening of 0.008 seconds. The opening time at this time is 0.02 seconds. Then, after opening the electric chew 23, the process ends after an ending of 0.008 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult to win the game ball in the electric chew 23 when this auxiliary game is executed. In the following, the auxiliary game associated with the winning symbols B and C in the non-time-short state is also referred to as “short opening auxiliary game”.

  In the auxiliary game associated with the winning symbol A to the winning symbol C in the short time state, the electric chew 23 is released once after the opening of 0.008 seconds. The opening time at this time is 3.00 seconds. Then, after opening the electric chew 23, the process ends after an ending of 0.008 seconds. Therefore, when this auxiliary game is executed, it is easy to win the game ball in the electric chew 23.

  Next, a game related to a special figure will be described. When the launched game ball wins the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 lottery is performed on condition that the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is less than four. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 411 performs variable display of the special figure 1 (stop display after performing the variable display), and notifies the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol, a small bonus symbol, and a lost symbol. In other words, the special drawing 1 lottery results include big hits, small hits, and loses. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the small hit game is executed. When the game ball enters the specific area 34 during the small hit game, the big hit game state is executed after the small hit game, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. On the other hand, when the lose symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game or the small hit game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

  Similarly, when the launched game ball wins the second starting port 22, the special figure 2 lottery is performed on condition that the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is less than one. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 412 performs variable display of the special figure 2 (stop display after performing the variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol, a small bonus symbol, and a lost symbol. In other words, the special drawing 2 lottery results include big hits, small hits, and loses. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the small hit game is executed. When the game ball enters the specific area 34 during the small hit game, the big hit game state is executed after the small hit game, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. On the other hand, when the lose symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game or the small hit game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

  In the following, when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is less than 4, winning the game ball at the first start port 20 is referred to as “establishment of the first start condition”, and the special figure 2 hold number ( The winning of a game ball at the second start port 22 when U2) is less than 1 is referred to as “establishment of the second start condition”. Further, “satisfaction of the first start condition” and “satisfaction of the second start condition” are collectively referred to as “satisfaction of the start condition”. Further, the special symbol lose symbol is also referred to as a “special loss symbol” in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal symbol lose symbol.

  In performing such a series of games (special drawing lottery, special display variable display, small hit game, big hit game, game state setting), the main control board 80 generates a special figure related random number by establishing the start condition. Acquire and perform various determinations on the random number. As shown in FIG. 7B, the special figure-related random numbers to be acquired include special symbol random numbers, jackpot symbol type random numbers, jackpot symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for making a jackpot determination. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The small hit symbol type random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the small hit symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for performing reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Specifically, the range of special symbol random numbers is 0 to 65535. The range of the jackpot symbol type random number is 0 to 199. The range of the small hit symbol type random number is 0 to 199. The range of reach random numbers is 0-255. The range of special figure fluctuation pattern random numbers is 0-99.

  Next, each determination performed using the special figure related random number will be described. First, the jackpot determination will be described. The jackpot determination is a determination for determining whether or not the jackpot game (whether or not to execute the jackpot game) using the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The jackpot determination table is a variably displayed special symbol type (special map 1 / special map 2), in other words, the type of start opening where the winning is attributed to the jackpot determination (which generated the jackpot determination). (First start port 20 / second start port 22). That is, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table (first jackpot determination table) used when performing variable display of the special figure 1 and a jackpot determination table (second jackpot determination table used when performing variable display of the special chart 2). Determination table).

  In each jackpot determination table, the determination values of special symbol random numbers (special symbol random number determination values) are distributed to the jackpot, the jackpot, and the loss that are the results of the jackpot determination. The main control board 80 collates the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table to determine whether the jackpot, the jackpot or the loss. As shown in FIG. 9A, the jackpot determination table used when performing variable display of FIG. 2 is smaller than the jackpot determination table used when performing variable display of FIG. Many special symbol random number judgment values to be judged are set.

  Next, the jackpot symbol type determination will be described. The jackpot symbol type determination is a determination for determining the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 9B when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type is associated with a jackpot constituent element constituted by the contents of the jackpot, in other words, a game privilege given to the player.

  The jackpot symbol type determination table is a variably displayed special symbol type (special symbol 1 / special symbol 2), in other words, a prize that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (which generated the jackpot symbol type determination) is performed. It is associated with the type of the start port (first start port 20 / second start port 22). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot symbol used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

  In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (a jackpot symbol type random number criterion value) is distributed to the jackpot symbol type as a result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Two types of jackpot symbols, jackpot symbol 1A to jackpot symbol 1B, are provided as jackpot symbols (according to Special Fig. 1) when winning the first starting port 20. On the other hand, two types of jackpot symbols, 2A to 2B, are provided as the jackpot symbols (according to Special Figure 2) when winning at the second starting port 22. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

  The jackpot winning probability and the jackpot symbol type allocation rate (%) are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, and can be set as appropriate. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to the four types of jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 9B, and can be set as appropriate. For example, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table, more or less than two types of jackpot symbols may be associated with the jackpot symbol type random number determination value. In the second jackpot symbol type determination table, more or less than two types of jackpot symbols may be associated with the jackpot symbol type random number determination value.

  Next, the small hit symbol type determination will be described. The small hit symbol type determination is to determine the type of the small bonus symbol (small bonus symbol type) using the small bonus symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 9C when the result of the big hit determination is a small bonus. It is a judgment of. The small hit symbol type is associated with a small hit component constituted by the content of the small hit, in other words, a game privilege given to the player.

  The small hit symbol type determination table is variably displayed special symbol type (Special Fig. 1 / Special Fig. 2), in other words, the small hit symbol type determination is caused (the small hit symbol type determination is generated). It is associated with the type of start opening (first start opening 20 / second start opening 22) where the winning is performed. That is, in the small hit symbol type determination table, when the small hit symbol type determination table (first small hit symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and when variable display of special figure 2 is performed. There is a small hit symbol type determination table (second small symbol type determination table) used.

  In each small hit symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type random number determination value (small hit symbol type random number determination value) is distributed to the small hit symbol type that is the result of the small hit symbol type determination. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired small hit symbol type random number with the big hit symbol type determination table to determine the type of the small hit symbol. As a small winning symbol (according to the special figure 1) when winning the first starting port 20, one kind of small winning symbol 1 of the small winning symbol 1 is provided. On the other hand, three types of small hit symbols, that is, a small hit symbol 2A to a small hit symbol 2C, are provided as the small hit symbol (according to the special figure 2) when the second starting port 22 is won. In the first small hit symbol type determination table and the second small bonus symbol type determination table, the small hit symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various small hit symbols.

  Note that the winning probability for small hits and the distribution rate (%) for the small hit symbol type are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 9A and 9C, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the types of the small hit symbols are not limited to the four types of small hit symbols shown in FIG. 9C, and can be set as appropriate. For example, in the first small hit symbol type determination table, more than one type of small hit symbols may be associated with the small hit symbol type random number determination value. In the second small hit symbol type determination table, more or fewer types of small hit symbols may be associated with the small hit symbol type random number determination value.

  Next, reach determination will be described. The reach determination is a determination for determining whether or not to generate a reach using the reach determination table shown in FIG. 9D when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. Here, in order to explain the reach, the special figure variation effect that is the premise of the reach will be described.

  When the special figure variable display is performed, a special figure variation effect is performed according to the variable display of the special figure. The special figure variation effect is performed using various effect devices such as the image display device 7, the panel movable device 15, the effect button 63, the frame lamp 66, and the speaker 67. As the special figure variation effect, the display unit 7a of the image display device 7 performs variable display of the effect symbol synchronized or substantially synchronized with the variable display of the special figure. In other words, the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner along with the special symbol, and the effect symbol is stopped (stop display) as the special symbol is stopped (stop display). The effect of displaying the effect symbol in a variable manner is also referred to as effect symbol variation effect. The effect symbol variation effect is a part of the “special symbol variation effect”.

  For example, on the display unit 7a, the effect symbols are, for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 displayed relatively on the left side, the medium effect symbol EZ2 displayed relatively in the middle, and the right effect symbol displayed relatively on the right side. EZ3 (see FIG. 17 and the like). In the following description, when the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are collectively referred to as “effect symbol EZ1, EZ2, EZ3”.

  The production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are each composed of numbers from “1” to “8”, for example. In the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, the numbers constituting the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in the display portion 7a, for example, by scrolling down from the top of the display portion 7a ( Numbers are changed one after another. In addition, as a mode of the variable display of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, other modes such as a mode of scrolling in the left-right direction (for example, from right to left) may be used. Moreover, the aspect which does not scroll display but the number which comprises an effect design in a predetermined fixed position one after another (for example, autorotates in the fixed position) may be sufficient. In the special figure variation effect, in addition to the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, an effect image other than the effect symbols such as a background image and a character image to be described later is also displayed.

  When the special figure is stopped and displayed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement (combination). That is, in the variable display, various numbers that are sequentially replaced in the display unit 7a are specified as one. At this time, the special figure (result of variable display, that is, the result of special symbol lottery) that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display 41 by the combination of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that have been stopped (specified). Is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally grasps the result of the special drawing lottery not by the special figure 1 display 411 or the special figure 2 display 412 but by the display unit 7a of the image display device 7.

  The reach is an effect for causing the player to expect a big hit using the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the variable effect. Specifically, reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is scroll-displayed among the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, and at which symbol the effect symbol that is scroll-displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “5 ↓ 5”) that is a combination of effect symbols indicating a big win, depending on whether or not (see FIG. 18D). The effect symbols that are not scroll-displayed in the reach are temporarily stopped at a predetermined position in the display unit 7a. The temporary stop means that a predetermined effect symbol stays at a substantially predetermined position (the predetermined effect symbol continues to be displayed in the display unit 7a). Repetitive reciprocating motions in the vertical direction, repeated slight swings, repeated enlargement and reduction, etc.). In addition, the aspect of a temporary stop is not restricted to these.

  The reach determination table is associated with a gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state). That is, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in a non-short-time state (non-time-short reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time-short state (time-short reach determination table). The details of the non-short-time state and the short-time state will be described later. However, the non-time-short state and the time-short state are the time required for the special symbol variation display (time from the start of the special diagram variation display to the time when the display result is derived: the special diagram. The game state has an influence on the fluctuation time), and in the short time state, the special figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-short time state.

  In each reach determination table, reach random number determination values (reach random number determination values) are assigned to the reach determination results “with reach (generate reach)” and “without reach (not generate reach)”. Yes. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table and determines whether there is reach or not (whether or not reach is generated). As shown in FIG. 9D, the reach random number used in the non-short-time state is determined to be “with reach (generates reach)” rather than the reach determination table used in the short-time state. Many judgment values are assigned. When the reach determination result is “reach is present (reach is generated)”, in most cases, reach occurs in the special figure variation effect. On the other hand, if the result of the reach determination is “no reach (no reach is generated)”, no reach occurs in the special figure variation effect. In the following, the result of reach determination performed on the assumption that the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” is “reach with reach (generates reach)” is referred to as “reach with reach” and “no reach ( "Reach is not generated)" is sometimes referred to as "no reach".

  By the way, when the special figure variable display is performed, in addition to the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, the small symbol variable display is also performed on the display unit 7a. The small symbols are variably displayed, for example, at the center portion and the upper portion of the right and left directions of the display portion 7a divided into three equal parts. The small symbols are an upper small symbol KZ1 displayed on the upper side relatively, a medium small symbol KZ2 displayed on the middle in the vertical direction, and a lower small symbol KZ3 relatively displayed on the lower side. (See FIG. 17 and the like). In the following, the upper and lower symbols KZ1, the small and medium symbols KZ2, and the lower and smaller symbols KZ3 may be collectively referred to as “small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3”.

  The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner with the start of the special figure changing display. That is, the change display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and the change display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are started simultaneously or substantially simultaneously. Each of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is configured by numbers from “1” to “8”, for example. In the variation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are sequentially replaced with different numbers on the spot. Therefore, while the special figure variation display is performed, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are performed. Then, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is stopped when the special figure fluctuation display is stopped. That is, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are started simultaneously or substantially simultaneously. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are basically performed by the same combination of numbers (stop display mode). Although details will be described later, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped before being completely stopped and displayed, but the temporary symbols are not displayed for the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. When the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are in the reach state, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are not in the reach state, and the three small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, special pattern variation pattern determination will be described. The special symbol variation pattern determination (special symbol variation pattern determination) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table (special diagram) shown in FIGS. 10 to 11 regardless of whether the big hit determination result is a big hit, a small hit or a loss. This is a determination for determining a fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern) of a special symbol fluctuation display using a fluctuation pattern judgment table). The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters relating to the special figure variation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production. It should be noted that the special figure variation pattern includes information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of reach determination in addition to the special figure variation time and the production flow (production contents) of the special figure fluctuation production.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is a type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) for displaying the fluctuation to be judged, in other words, the start opening where the winning due to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment is performed. It is associated with the type (first start port 20 / second start port 22). That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table: FIG. 10) used when performing fluctuation display of special figure 1 and a fluctuation display of special figure 2. There is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing.

  Each special figure variation pattern determination table is also associated with a gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state). That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time reduction state) used in a non-short-time state and a special figure used in a time-short state. FIG. 1 is a fluctuation pattern determination table (a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for a short time state). On the other hand, for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, similarly, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time reduction state) used in a non-time-short state and a special-time fluctuation state determination table. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for a short time state) to be used.

  Each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state) is also associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. In other words, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time-short state include a big hit, a small hit, a reach loss, and a no reach loss, respectively. Similarly, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the short-time state respectively include a big hit, a small big hit, a reach loss, and a no reach loss.

  Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for each reachless loss is also associated with the special figure holding number. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 3 to 4. And a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing without reach.

  As described above, in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the type of special symbol or the gaming state, the special figure fluctuation pattern random value (special value) is added to the special figure fluctuation pattern as a result of the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment. The figure variation pattern random number judgment value) is distributed. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern. Then, the special symbol display 41 performs the special symbol variation display of the special symbol variation time according to the special diagram variation pattern determined by this determination.

  When the special symbol variation display is performed, a special diagram variation effect based on the special diagram variation pattern is performed. The special figure variation effect includes the normal special diagram variation effect in which the variation display mode ends while the variation display mode is maintained in the normal normal mode after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, and the variation display of the effect symbol. There is a special special figure variation effect in which the variation display mode becomes a special mode different from normal. Here, the special embodiment includes the reach described above.

  The special figure variation pattern includes information related to the production flow constituting the production content of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure fluctuation time. The effect flow of this special figure fluctuation effect is shown in the third item from the right of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Here, each effect which comprises the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation effect linked | related with the special figure fluctuation pattern is demonstrated.

  The direct flow, special reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), last challenge production (last chare), and re-challenges There is production (re-challenge).

  The normal variation is basically an effect in which the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a high speed so that it is difficult to recognize each effect symbol without causing the effect symbols to become special. All parts of the normal special figure fluctuation effect (the part from the start of change of the effect symbol to the stop of the change) and the part until the reach in the special special figure change effect is established (confirmed) are composed of normal fluctuations. .

  N Reach is a state in which the effect design constituting the reach is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) immediately after the reach is established (confirmed), and the remaining one design symbol is decelerated. It is an effect that fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The jackpot expectation suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach described later. When the special figure variation effect ends with N reach, the remaining one effect symbol that varies at the low speed stops. In the case of a big hit, the remaining one effect symbol basically stops at the same effect symbol as the effect symbol constituting the reach. In the case of a small hit, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol that shows a small hit in combination with another effect symbol that has been stopped first. In the case of losing, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol different from the effect symbols constituting the reach. If the special drawing variation effect does not end in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes again at high speed, and the reach is maintained from N reach to the next effect (in the first embodiment, L reach or SP reach). ) (Changes).

  In the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbol constituting the reach is reduced and at a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 7a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 7a). In the state moved to the upper right), a background image dedicated to L reach is displayed (video is streamed), and the effect is performed for a longer time than N reach. In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 7a. As the effect of L reach, a scene composed of a predetermined story is displayed.

  In the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbol constituting the reach is reduced and at a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 7a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 7a). In the state of moving to the upper right), a dedicated background image for a longer time than the L reach background image is displayed (video flows). In the SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 7a. Then, as the effect of the SP reach, a scene in which a predetermined character battles with an enemy character at an enemy base is displayed (a video for battle flows on the display unit 7a).

  In the “reach state maintained” in the N reach, L reach, and SP reach, the production symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, and SP reach can be visually recognized on the display unit 7a. In addition to the state, for example, it is assumed that the effect symbols constituting the reach for a predetermined period in relation to a dedicated background image include a state where it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize from the display unit 7a.

  The last challenge effect (last chare) is an effect that can be executed mainly in response to the special figure 2 variable display in a non-time-short state, and is performed in an expansive manner following the normal figure change effect and the auxiliary game effect described later. (Executed). The last challenge effect is an effect executed regardless of the success or failure of the reach. In the last challenge production, a dedicated background image is displayed (a dedicated video flows). In the background image dedicated to producing the last challenge, an image is displayed indicating whether the main character succeeds or fails in a predetermined challenge (last challenge).

  The re-challenge effect (re-challenge) is an effect that can be executed mainly according to the special figure 2 variable display in the non-time-short state, and is revived (executed) following the last challenge effect. The re-challenge effect is also performed regardless of the success or failure of the reach. In the re-challenge production, a dedicated background image is displayed (a dedicated video flows). In the background image dedicated to the re-challenge effect, a video is displayed as to whether or not the hero character can clear a predetermined mission (re-mission).

  In addition, as shown in the rightmost column of the tables of FIGS. 10 to 11, the special figure (big hit determination result) and the fluctuation are shown for the special figure (big hit determination result) and the special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. It is assumed that a name is attached in association with the production contents of the production. The special figure fluctuation pattern related to jackpot is also referred to as “jackpot fluctuation”. Similarly, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the small hit is “small hit fluctuation”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern in which the SP reach is performed in the reach lost is “SP reach lose fluctuation” in the reach lost. Special reach fluctuation pattern where L reach is performed is “L reach loss change”. Special reach change pattern where special figure change production is finished with N reach among lost with reach is “N reach reach change”, without reach. Such a special figure fluctuation pattern is referred to as “normal loss fluctuation”.

  In addition, the flow of special figure variation effects related to normal A loss variation to normal C loss variation that can be selected in a non-time-short state is composed of only normal variation. The difference is 13 seconds, 8 seconds and 4 seconds. Similarly, the production flow of the variation effect related to the shortened A loss variation and the shortened B loss variation that can be selected in the short-time state is configured only by the normal variation, but the special diagram variation time of the special diagram variation pattern is 6 seconds. And 3 seconds.

  Next, the determination time of the special symbol will be described. The special symbol determination time determination (special symbol determination time determination) is a special symbol determination time determination table (special symbol determination time determination) shown in FIG. 12 regardless of whether the jackpot determination result is a big hit, a small hit or a loss. This is a determination for determining the time required for special symbol stop display (special symbol determination time) using a table. The special symbol stop display is performed after the special symbol change display, and the time required for the stop display is the special symbol determination time. Therefore, in a situation where there is a special figure hold, when the special figure fluctuation display currently being executed is terminated and the special figure fluctuation display is performed, the special figure confirmation time has elapsed since the special figure fluctuation display is stopped. The following special figure variable display is started.

  The special figure determination time determination table is associated with the gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state). That is, the special figure determination time determination table includes a special figure determination time determination table (a special figure determination time determination table for a non-time-short state) and a special figure determination time used in a time-short state. There is a determination table (special figure fixed time determination table for short-time state).

  In addition, the special figure determination time determination table is a special symbol type (special figure 1 / special figure 2) for displaying a stop to be determined, in other words, a start in which a winning due to the special figure determination time determination is performed. It is associated with the type of mouth (first start port 20 / second start port 22). In other words, the special figure confirmation time determination table includes a special figure confirmation time determination table (special figure 1 confirmation time determination table) used when the special figure 1 stop display is performed and a special figure 2 stop display. There is a special figure determination time determination table (special figure 2 determination time determination table) to be used.

  That is, the special figure determination time determination table includes a special figure determination time determination table for special figure 1 used in the non-time-short state and a special figure determination time determination for special figure 2 used in the non-time-short state. There are a table, a special figure determination time determination table for special figure 1 used in the time reduction state, and a special figure determination time determination table for special figure 2 used in the time reduction state.

  As described above, in each special figure determination time determination table associated with the gaming state and the special symbol type, the special figure determination time is stored in association with the big hit determination result (big hit, small hit and lose). Yes. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the result of the jackpot determination with the special figure determination time determination table to determine the special figure determination time. Then, the special symbol display unit 41 performs a special symbol stop display of the special symbol determination time determined by this determination.

  In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the display unit 7a performs the stop display of the effect symbol and the stop symbol of the small symbol. However, although details will be described later, the stop display of the small symbol is always performed when the special symbol stop display is performed, but the stop display of the effect symbol may not be performed.

  Further, when the game ball wins the start opening 20 or 22 and acquires the special figure related random number, the main control board 80 once stores it in an area (for example, a buffer) different from the special figure holding storage unit 85 of the RAM 84. Then, the start winning command is specified based on the random number and transmitted to the sub-control board 90. The start winning command includes information on special figure fluctuation patterns (special figure fluctuation pattern information) determined by special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed based on the acquired special figure-related random numbers. As described above, since the special figure variation pattern includes information on the type of the start opening, in other words, the type of the special figure, the start winning command includes the type of the starting opening that generated the start winning command. Information (winning start opening information), in other words, a variable display special figure type (special figure type information) to be performed by winning that generated the start winning command is also included. In addition, the special figure variation pattern includes information on whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no-go information) and information on the presence / absence of reach (reach information). Will also include success / failure information and reach information.

  The main control board 80 specifies the start winning command using the start winning command specifying table shown in FIG. 13 based on the acquired special figure related random number. The start winning command specifying table is associated with the type of start opening (first start opening 20 / second start opening 22) related to the start winning. That is, the start winning command specifying table includes a starting winning command specifying table (first starting winning command specifying table) when winning at the first starting port 20 and a starting winning command specifying when winning at the second starting port 22. Table (second start winning command specifying table).

  Further, the start winning command specifying table is also associated with the gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state). That is, the start winning command specifying table includes a starting winning command specifying table used in a non-short-time state (start winning command specifying table for a non-time-saving state) and a starting winning command specifying table used in a time-saving state (time-saving). There is a start winning command specific table for state).

  That is, the start winning command specifying table is used in the first start winning command specifying table used in the non-time-saving state, the first starting winning command specifying table used in the time-saving state, and used in the non-time-saving state. There are a second start winning command specifying table and a second starting winning command specifying table used in the time-short state.

  The start winning command only needs to include at least the success / failure information, and what information is included in the starting winning command can be appropriately changed. As described above, the special symbol variable display is performed based on the special symbol related random number. However, prior to the special symbol variable display executed based on the special symbol related random number, the success / failure information or the like is displayed on the sub-control board 90. By transmitting to, it becomes possible to execute a pre-reading effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot, such as a pending change notice to be described later, and improve the game entertainment.

  As described above, by performing jackpot determination, jackpot symbol type determination, jackpot symbol type determination, reach determination, special figure variation pattern determination, and special figure determination time determination, special figure variable display on special figure display 41 Is done. Then, if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the special symbol variable display, the next special symbol variable display is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. The In addition, if the special symbol variable display, if the small hit symbol is stopped as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery), the next special symbol variable display is not immediately performed, and the small bonus game is subsequently Executed. When the game ball passes through the specific area 34 in the small hit game, the variable display of the next special figure is not performed, and the big hit game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game and the jackpot game will be described. In the following, the jackpot game and the jackpot game are collectively referred to as “special game”.

  First, the small hit game will be described. The small win game is held in a closed state until the second big prize opening 32 is opened after the second big prize opening 32 is opened and closed once and the second big prize opening 32 is opened. Opening (also referred to as OP), and an ending (also referred to as ED) in which the big winning holes 30 and 32 are held in a closed state after the opening of the second big winning opening 32 ends and the small hit game ends. ).

  The elements that make up the small hit game (small hit game constituent elements) are associated with the types of the small hit symbols that are stopped and displayed as an opportunity for the small hit game. The small hit game components include the opening time of the second big prize opening 32, the opening time (small hit opening time), the ending time (small hit ending time), and the like.

  The small hit game components are stored in a special game control table for controlling the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 14, the special game control table is associated with the small hit symbol. Therefore, the main control board 80 executes (controls) the small hit game using the special game control table corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed. Here, the small hit game according to the type of the small hit symbol will be described.

  Small winning symbols can be won by special drawing 1 lottery (can be stopped and displayed by special figure 1 variable display) and small winning symbols can be won by special drawing 2 lottery (can be stopped and displayed by special figure 2 variable display) There are four types of small hit symbols: small hit symbol 2A to small hit symbol 2C.

  In the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 1, after the opening of 4.600 seconds, the second big prize opening 32 is opened and closed after 1.6 seconds. That is, the second grand prize opening 32 is opened for 1.6 seconds. Then, after one opening and closing of the second grand prize opening 32, the small hit game is completed after ending for 3.000 seconds.

  In the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, after the opening of 0.008 seconds, the second big prize opening 32 is opened and closed after 1.6 seconds. That is, the second grand prize opening 32 is opened for 1.6 seconds. Then, after opening and closing the second grand prize winning opening 32 once, after an ending of 6.000 seconds, the small hit game is finished. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening time of the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C is extremely short, and the opening time of the second big prize opening 32 allows the game ball to enter. However, it is not an easy time, but it is not long but basically short. Therefore, even if the game ball is fired after the small hit game starts, the ball enters the second big prize opening 32. Difficult or impossible to do. In other words, it is easy for the second big prize opening 32 to fire the game ball after the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C starts and to enter the second big prize hole 32. It is placed in a position that is not or is difficult or impossible.

  Thus, the small hit game according to the type of the small hit symbol is executed, but when the small hit game is started, in other words, from the start of the small hit opening, the distribution member 36K of the distribution device 36, Regardless of the type of small winning symbol, it operates in a certain manner of operation. Here, an operation mode of the sorting member 36K in the small hit game will be described.

  The distribution member 36K is normally held in the passage-blocking state, but when 0.008 seconds (8 ms) have elapsed from the start of the small hit opening, the passage member is allowed to pass, and the state is 4.600 seconds. After being held (4600 ms), it is returned to the passage blocking state. As a result, in the 7.608 second small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbols 1, 2A to 2C, the sorting member 36K is “0.008 second passage blocked state → 4.6 second passage permitted state → 3 It is controlled in a series of constant modes of operation consisting of “.000 second passage blocking state”. Since the specific region 34 takes a closed state in which a prize cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won by the sorting member 36K, the operation mode of the sorting member 36K can be referred to as an opening / closing mode of the specific region 34. . Hereinafter, the operation mode of the sorting member 36 </ b> K is also referred to as “opening / closing mode of the specific region 34”.

  In this way, the distribution member 36K is controlled in a constant operation mode (the specific region 34 is a constant opening / closing mode), but the constant operation mode of the distribution member 36K (the constant opening / closing mode of the specific region 34), In combination with the opening / closing mode of the second big prize opening 32 in the small hit game, the difficulty (easyness) of entering the game ball into the specific area 34 in the small hit game is set. That is, in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 1, the second big prize opening 32 is opened for 1.6 seconds after the small hit opening of 4.600 seconds is performed, so that the distribution member 36K is in the passage permitted state. The period that overlaps the period that is held in step 2 and the period that the second grand prize winning opening 32 is open is only the last 0.008 seconds in the passage-permitted state of the sorting member 36K. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 34 in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 1. On the other hand, in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, after the opening of 0.008 seconds is performed, the second big prize opening 32 is opened for 1.6 seconds, so that the distributing member 36K is The period of overlap between the period held in the passage-permitted state and the period in which the second big prize opening 32 is open is 1.6 seconds of the entire period in which the second big prize opening 32 is open. . Therefore, in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, it is easy to allow the game ball to enter the specific area 34. Thus, the difficulty (easyness) of allowing the game ball to enter the specific area 34 is set by the combination of the open / close mode of the specific area 34 and the open / close mode of the second big prize opening 32. Hereinafter, the entry of the game ball into the specific area 34 (passing through the specific area 34) is also referred to as “V passing”. If V is passed during the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol is executed with the end of the small hit game. The fact that the specific area 34 is in an open state is also referred to as “V opening”.

  In addition, since it is difficult to pass V in the small hit game according to the small hit symbol 1, the small hit game according to the small hit symbol 1 is referred to as “V non-pass small bonus game”, and the small hit symbol 1 is referred to as “V non-V Also called “passing small hits”. In addition, since it is easy to pass V in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C is called "V pass small hit game". The small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C are also referred to as “V passing small hits”.

  Next, the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the jackpot game, the game ball passes through the specific area 34 when the jackpot symbol is stopped (by one kind of jackpot) or in the jackpot game executed with the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed. (By two big hits).

  The jackpot game is held in a closed state until the first round game is started after the first round game is started after a plurality of round games with opening and closing of the first jackpot 30. Opening (also referred to as OP) and an ending (also referred to as ED) in which the big winning openings 30 and 32 are held closed until the end of the jackpot game after the final round game is completed . Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending. In the following, the round game of the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as “round”. For example, the first round game (first round) is called “1 round (1R)”, and the 10th round game is called “10 rounds (10R)”.

  The elements constituting the jackpot game (the jackpot game component) include the number of round games, the number of times of opening the first big prize opening 30 in each round game, the opening time of the first big prize opening 30, and closing until the next opening Time (closing time) for opening, opening time (opening time: OP time), ending time (ending time: ED time), and the like. The jackpot game component is stored in a special game control table for controlling the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 14, the special game control table is set for each jackpot symbol and each jackpot symbol.

  In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1A, the jackpot symbol 1B, the jackpot symbol 2A, and the jackpot symbol 2B, 15 round games are executed after the opening of 10.000 seconds. In each round game, the closed first first prize opening 30 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closes again. Here, “maximum” means that a predetermined number of game balls (a predetermined number of winning prizes: “9” in the first embodiment) in one round game wins the big winning openings 30 and 32. This is because even if the first grand prize opening 30 is not open for 29.5 seconds in the round game, it is forcibly closed at that time. In each round game, the closed state is maintained for 2.0 seconds after the opening of the first big prize opening 30 is completed. The closed state after opening the first big prize opening 30 is also referred to as “interval”. Then, when the round game is executed 15 times, the jackpot game is finished after an ending of 15.000 seconds.

  Thus, the total number of round games in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1A, jackpot symbol 1B, jackpot symbol 2A, and jackpot symbol 2B is 15, and the number of substantial round games is also 15. A substantial round game is a round game that allows a game ball to be actually won up to a prescribed number of winnings. In the following, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1A, the jackpot symbol 1B, the jackpot symbol 2A, the jackpot symbol 2B, the jackpot symbol 2A to the jackpot symbol 2C is referred to as a “15R jackpot game”.

  In the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, after the small hit game ends, 15 round games are executed with an opening of 10.000 seconds. Note that for the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2A to the jackpot symbol 2C, the jackpot game is regarded as one round, and the 15th round game from the first round game out of the 15 round games is 2 Treat as round to 16 rounds. As a result, the number of executions of the round game in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2A to the jackpot symbol 2C is 16. In the 2 to 16 rounds of jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2A to the jackpot symbol 2C, the first jackpot 30 is closed after being opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds. Similarly to the 15R jackpot game, in the 2nd to 16th rounds, after the opening of the first big prize opening 30 is finished, the first big prize opening 30 is held in a closed state for 2.0 seconds. Then, when the round game is executed 15 times, the jackpot game is finished after an ending of 15.000 seconds.

  Thus, the total number of round games in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2A to the jackpot symbol 2C is 16 times. Since the opening time of the second big prize opening 32 in the small hit game constituting one round is 1.6 seconds, during the small hit game, that is, in the first round, the game ball is inserted into the second big prize opening 32. It is difficult to win the prescribed number of winnings. Therefore, the number of substantial round games in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2A to the jackpot symbol 2C is fifteen. Therefore, in the following, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2A to the jackpot symbol 2C is also referred to as “15R jackpot game”.

  Even in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1, after the bonus game is finished, 15 round games are executed with an opening of 10.000 seconds, and after the ending of 10.000 seconds, the jackpot game Ends. Also, in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1, the jackpot game is regarded as one round, and the first round game to the 15th round game out of the 15 round games is round 2 to 16 rounds. Treat as. Therefore, the number of round games executed in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 is also 16 times. However, unlike the 15R jackpot game corresponding to the small bonus symbol 2A to the small bonus symbol 2C, the first grand prize winning opening 30 is opened for 29.5 seconds at the maximum in one round game from 2 to 6 rounds. From the 7th round to the 16th round, the first grand opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds with one opening. From the 7th to 16th rounds of this jackpot game, the opening time of the first big prize opening 30 is extremely short, and it is a round game in which the winning to the first big prize opening 30 cannot be expected in reality. That is, the total number of round games in this jackpot game is 16, but the actual number of round games is 5. Therefore, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 is also referred to as “5R jackpot game”.

  When the jackpot game is performed as described above, the main control board 80 newly sets the gaming state after the jackpot game as the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the main control board 80 sets a time reduction state with the end of the jackpot game. Here, the newly set time reduction state is obtained by executing a variable display of a special figure of a predetermined number of times (specified number of time reductions) without performing a big win in the time reduction state, or The game ends when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed before the variable display of the special figure for the specified number of times is executed. In other words, the number of short-time prescribed times constitutes a newly established short-term state specified period, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot that causes the short-time state, and the jackpot symbol type or the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot winner Is set based on Specifically, it is determined on the basis of the time reduction prescribed number determination table shown in FIG.

  The prescribed time limit for the time saving state set when winning the jackpot symbol 1A or the jackpot symbol 2A is 100 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot symbol. In addition, the specified number of time reductions in the short-time state set when winning the jackpot symbol 1B or jackpot symbol 2B is five times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  In addition, the specified number of time reductions in the short time state set when winning the small winning symbol 1 is 5 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. In addition, the prescribed number of time reductions in the short time state set when winning the small winning symbol 2A is 100 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big winning. In addition, the prescribed number of time reductions in the time saving state set when winning the small winning symbol 2C is 5 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big winning. In addition, the specified number of time reductions in the short time state set when winning the small winning symbol 2B is 100 times if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a non-short time state, and is 5 times in the short time state.

  In the jackpot symbol type determination for Special Figure 1, the jackpot symbol type determination for Special Figure 2 is 50%, whereas the jackpot symbol (Big Jack symbol 1A) with a relatively large number of time reductions is 50%. The allocation rate of the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol 2A) having a relatively large number of times of time reduction is 70% (see FIG. 9B). Further, in the jackpot determination for Special Figure 1, the probability of winning a small hit is about 1%, whereas in the jackpot determination for Special Figure 2, the probability of winning a small hit is about 16% ( (See FIG. 9A). In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special drawing 2 lottery in which the game ball is won in the second starting port 22 rather than the special drawing 1 lottery in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20 However, this is advantageous for the player.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a normal gaming state that is a normal gaming state and a short-time state. In the short time state, the special figure variation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the short-time state, the special-figure fluctuation pattern is determined using a special-figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is determined so that a special-figure fluctuation pattern with a short special-figure fluctuation time is selected more than in the non-short-time state. A determination is made (see FIGS. 10 to 11). As a result, in the short-time state, the special-patch holding pace is accelerated, and an effective winning (a winning that can be stored as a special-pending hold) at the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  Further, in the short time state, the normal time fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal game state. In the first embodiment, the usual figure fluctuation time is determined based on a usual figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state. Specifically, the normal fluctuation time is determined to be 1.0 seconds, 30.0 seconds, or 25.0 seconds in the non-short-time state, and is determined to be 1.0 seconds in the time-short state. . Therefore, the number of executions per unit time of the regular drawing lottery is larger in the time reduction state. Considering this fact and the probability that the winning determination in the winning determination is the same in the normal gaming state and the shortened time state, it can be said that the shorter number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time in the shorter time state. it can.

  Furthermore, in the short time state, the opening time of the electric chew 23 in one auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the normal state. This is because, in the normal gaming state, in one auxiliary game, the 5.0 second electric Chu 23 is released with a probability of 70/65536, and the 0.02 second electric Chu 23 is released with a probability of 65446/65536. While the expected value of the opening time of the electric Chu 23 is 5.0 seconds × (70/65536) +0.02 seconds × (65446/65536) = 0.025 seconds, one auxiliary game in the short-time state This is because the opening time of the electric chew 23 is 3.0 seconds.

  Thus, in the short time state, the open time of the electric chew 23 per unit time is longer than in the normal game state, and it is easy for the game balls to win frequently at the second start port 22. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, in a short time state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big win without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed.

  It should be noted that, in the short-time state, the normal time fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal game state, and the opening time of the electric chew 23 in one auxiliary game is likely to be long. In this respect, it is set to be advantageous to the player, but either one may be set to be advantageous to the player. In addition to these, or without these advantageous points being set, the probability that the time-short state is determined to be a hit in the hit determination may be higher than that in the normal gaming state. Finally, in the short time state, it is sufficient that the opening time of the electric chew 23 per unit time becomes longer than in the normal game state, and the game balls are likely to win frequently at the second start port 22. Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a “non-time-saving state” in which the time-saving state is not set. And in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning probability in the winning determination of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the winning symbol A in the winning symbol type determination, the normal figure changing time, the opening time of the second starting port 22 in the auxiliary game, the game In consideration of the arrangement of the nail and all the factors that affect the winning to the first start port 20 and the second start port 22, such as the positions of the first start port 20 and the second start port 22, In the (normal game state), the first start port 20 is easier to win than the second start port 22 (electric chew 23), and in the short time state, the second start port 22 (electric chew) is more than the first start port 20. 23) is easier to win.

  The gaming state after the power is first turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a “normal gaming state”. In addition, during the jackpot game, the game state is set to the normal game state. That is, with the start of the jackpot game, the game state is reset and the normal game state is set.

4). Description of production by the sub-control board 90 As described above, the main control board 80 performs special drawing lottery, special display variable display, jackpot game, etc., when the game ball wins the start openings 20 and 22. The sub-control board 90 executes various effects according to the contents of the games played by these main control boards 80. Hereinafter, specific examples of various effects performed by the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 36, the display portion 7a of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially simplified and extracted in order to explain various effects.

4-1. Special figure variation effect First, the special figure variation effect will be described. When the variable display of the special symbol is started, the sub-control board 90 has a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol lottery result (a jackpot determination result, a jackpot symbol type determination result, a reach determination result, and The special figure fluctuation effect is controlled based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result). In the special figure variation effect, the display part 7a performs variable display of the effect symbol in a superimposed manner on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol stops after the effect symbol fluctuates. That is, after the special symbol variation time and the effect symbol variation display are performed, the variation is stopped, and the effect symbol stop display is performed. When the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the possibility of winning the jackpot (the so-called “big hit expectation”) may be suggested. And the result of a special figure lottery is alert | reported by the stop display of an effect design.

  The production content of the special figure variation production is associated with the production mode. The effect mode is a category (or higher-level conceptual attribute) of the special figure change effect. In the first embodiment, a normal effect mode and a time reduction effect mode are set as the effect modes. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation effect includes a special figure fluctuation effect in the normal effect mode and a special figure change effect in the time reduction effect mode.

  The normal effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the normal game state and indicates the normal game state. When the normal effect mode is set, a mountain background image is displayed on the display unit 7a. On the other hand, the time reduction effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the time reduction state, and is an effect mode that indicates that the time reduction state. When the time reduction effect mode is set, the space background image is displayed on the display unit 7a. The background image here is mainly the reach other than the L reach, the SP reach in the special variation effect, and the challenge effect to V, which will be described later, in other words, all the sections in the normal change effect. This is the section from the start of L-reaching or SP-reaching in the special variation production (the section from the start of the special drawing production to the reach + during the N reach) and the background image when the special drawing production and the demonstration production are not executed. is there. As will be described later, in the L reach, SP reach, and V challenge effects, a background image dedicated to the effect is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the background image in the normal effect mode includes a background image G100 (daytime normal background image G100) representing a daytime mountain landscape and a background image G101 (nighttime) representing a nighttime mountain landscape. There are a normal background image G101) and a background image G102 (evening normal background image G102) representing the mountain scenery in the evening. The daytime normal background image G100, the nighttime normal background image G101, and the evening normal background image G102 are displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot when the normal background image is displayed. It is switched as one condition that the figure variation effect is performed. In the first embodiment, when the special day variation effect is performed 50 times while the daytime normal background image G100 is displayed, the daytime normal background image G100 is switched to the evening normal background image G102, and the evening normal background is displayed. When the special figure variation effect is performed 50 times while the image G102 is displayed, the normal background image G101 is switched from the evening normal background image G102 to the night normal background image G101. When the special drawing variation effect is performed, the night normal background image G101 is switched to the daytime normal background image G100. That is, the normal background image is switched in a predetermined order, such as the daytime normal background image G100 → the evening normal background image G102 → the night normal background image G101 → the daytime normal background image G100. Note that the normal daytime background image G100 is displayed immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  Next, the area | region which produces an effect in the display part 7a is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), the left side, the center, and the right side of the display unit 7a divided into three in the horizontal direction are equally divided into the left side design symbol region 70a1, the central product design region 70a2, and the right side design symbol region. 70a3. The left effect symbol area 70a1 is an area for displaying the left effect symbol EZ1 when the special effect and the N reach in the special symbol variation effect and the effect symbol stop display. Similarly, the center effect symbol area 70a2 and the right effect symbol area 70a3 are areas for displaying the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the right and left ends of the display portion 7a are divided into three substantially equal parts in the vertical direction, and the center and the upper side are respectively shown in the special symbol 1 corresponding small symbol region 71a and the special symbol 2 corresponding small. Let it be a symbol area 72a. The special symbol 1 corresponding small symbol region 71a is a region in which the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed when the special symbol 1 variable display is performed. The special symbol 2 corresponding small symbol region 72a is a region in which the small symbol is variably displayed when the special symbol 2 variable display is performed.

  In FIG. 17A, the left effect design area 70a1, the center effect design area 70a2, the right effect design area 70a3, the special figure 1 compatible small design area 71a, and the special illustration 2 compatible small design area 72a are clearly indicated by broken lines. This is described in order to represent the range of the left effect symbol area 70a1, the center effect symbol area 70a2, the right effect symbol area 70a3, the special symbol 1 corresponding small symbol region 71a, and the special symbol 2 corresponding small symbol region 72a. Yes, not actually displayed.

  Next, a specific example of the special figure variation effect will be described. However, in the following, the special figure change effect performed when the normal effect mode is set and the daytime normal background image G100 is displayed on the display unit 7a will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, on the display unit 7a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the medium effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the normal daytime background image G100. The symbol KZ1, small and medium symbols KZ2, and the lower small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed, the special symbol variation display is not performed, and the special symbol variation display starts from the state of waiting for the special symbol variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), along with the start, the change display of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started, and the change of the upper and lower symbols KZ1, the middle and small symbols KZ2, and the lower small symbol KZ3 Display starts. If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the newly started special symbol fluctuation display is a special figure fluctuation pattern with no reach loss (for example, a normal A loss fluctuation), the special symbol fluctuation does not occur without reaching. With the end of the display (stop display of special symbols), the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are performed at the losing eyes (so-called “separated eyes”) peculiar to losing without reach. For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then the display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is stopped. As shown in FIG. 17, the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at the approximately vertical center position, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the medium effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at the approximately vertical center position. And finally, the design symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped in a state where they are lined up in the horizontal direction at substantially the center position in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. Stop is confirmed (stop display of effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is performed). When the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped completely stop with a break, that is, when the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped, the three small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are Stops at the same time with the same break as the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 17, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is performed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1, the right effect symbol EZ3, and the middle effect symbol EZ2. The aspect to stop is not restricted to this, It can set suitably.

  Next, the special figure variation effect when the reach occurs will be described. In this case, as in the case of no reach described above, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display unit 7a as shown in FIG. From the state where the upper and lower symbols KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2 and the lower and smaller symbols KZ3 are stopped and displayed, the special symbol variation display is started, and as shown in FIG. 18B, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are displayed. It is assumed that the change display of the upper and lower symbols KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the lower and lower symbols KZ3 starts while the change display starts. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (C), the left effect design EZ1 consisting of the number “5” temporarily stops at the substantially vertical center position, and then, as shown in FIG. 18 (D), the same number The right effect symbol EZ3 consisting of “5” temporarily stops in parallel in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and reaches (reach occurs or is established). Even if reach is established in the effect symbol, the change display of the upper and lower symbols KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2 and the lower and smaller symbols KZ3 is continued.

  In the example of FIG. 18, when the reach occurs, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3. Can do. In addition, the number of production symbols constituting the reach is not limited to “5”. Also, the temporary stop position is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the production symbols constituting the reach are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

  Next, an effect (reach effect) performed in a state where the reach is held after reach is established will be described. As shown in FIG. 18D, when reach is established, N reach is started from that point. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 19A, the state where the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, the medium effect symbol EZ2 which is changing and displaying (scrolling) at a high speed in the normal mode is gradually decelerated.

  Here, when the special figure variation effect being executed ends with N reach, the intermediate effect symbol EZ2 is temporarily stopped from the N reach state at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and an effect according to the result of the special figure lottery. The symbol is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special drawing lottery caused by the special drawing variation effect being executed is “losing”, the stop display of the production symbol indicating the losing is performed. In this special figure variation effect, reach has occurred, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 19 (B), the number is different from the numbers constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 19 (B-1)). The production symbol EZ2 is temporarily stopped. Then, with the end of the special symbol fluctuation display (special symbol stop display), as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, which is characteristic of the loss with reach. The stop display of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is performed with the eyes. In addition, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped completely stop at a loss specific to reach loss, that is, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 are stopped and displayed, three small symbols are displayed. The symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are stopped at the same time as the losing peculiar to the loss with the same reach as the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special figure lottery is “big hit” and the special figure variation effect ends with N reach, as shown in FIG. 19 (B-2), for example, it is the same as the numbers constituting the reach. As shown in FIG. 19 (C-2), the middle production symbol EZ2 consisting of numerals temporarily stops at the substantially vertical center position, and the special symbol change display ends (the special symbol stop display), as shown in FIG. The state is completely stopped, and the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed with a hitting characteristic peculiar to a jackpot such as a doublet. In addition, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped completely stop with a hitting characteristic peculiar to the jackpot, that is, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped, the three small symbols KZ1. , KZ2 and KZ3 are stopped at the same hitting points unique to the same big hit as the production symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when it does not end with N reach, in other words, when it develops to L reach or SP reach, for example, when it ends with N reach, the medium effect symbol EZ2 is approximately the same timing as the temporary stop of the medium effect symbol EZ2. Again displays the fluctuation in the normal mode (at high speed) and enters the L reach or SP reach.

  When the N reach reaches the L reach, the temporarily stopped left effect symbol EZ1 moves to the upper left of the display portion 7a while being reduced, and the temporarily stopped right effect symbol EZ3 is reduced while the upper right portion of the display portion 7a is reduced. (See FIG. 20A-1). Further, the daytime normal background image G100 is switched to the background image G105 dedicated to L reach (see FIG. 20A-1). The background image G105 dedicated to L reach is composed of a video (scene) by 2DCG in which the main character and enemy characters battle in the city. On the other hand, in the case of developing from N reach to SP reach, similarly to L reach, the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stopped moves to the upper left of the display portion 7a while being reduced, and the right effect symbol temporarily stopped. The EZ3 moves to the upper right of the display unit 7a while being reduced (see FIG. 20A-2). In addition, the background image G106 for normal daytime is switched to the background image G106 dedicated to SP reach (see FIG. 20A-2). The background image G106 dedicated to SP reach is composed of a video (scene) based on 3DCG in which the main character and the enemy character battle at the enemy's hideout.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 20B-1, finally, when it is lost, the background image G105 exclusively for L reach or the background image G106 exclusively for SP reach is switched to the daytime normal background image G100, and the lose is lost. Is displayed (stop display of effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and stop display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3), and the following special symbol variation effect is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20 (B-2), the jackpot is finally switched from the background image G105 dedicated to L reach or the background image G106 dedicated to SP reach to the daytime normal background image G100 and the jackpot. Is displayed (stop display of effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and stop display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3), and a big hit game effect is performed.

4-2. Holding Effect Next, the holding effect corresponding to the special figure 1 hold will be described. In the description of the holding effect, the display and description of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are omitted.

  As described above, even if a game ball is won at the first starting port 20 and a special figure 1 related random number is acquired, a special figure variable display is being executed at that time, or a special game is being executed. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display cannot be immediately performed based on the acquired special figure 1 related random number. In such a case, the main control board 80 stores the special figure 1 related random number in the special figure 1 storage unit 851 of the RAM 84 and holds the special figure 1 variable display. When the special figure 1 variable display is put on hold, in other words, when the special figure 1 hold is generated, the sub-control board 90 performs a holding effect representing the special figure 1 hold. Specifically, the main control board 80 specifies the start winning command including the success / failure information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information based on the acquired special figure 1 related random number, and transmits it to the sub control board 90. The sub-control board 90 executes the hold effect based on the transmitted start winning command.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 73a formed in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display portion 7a. The hold display area 73a includes a first area 73a1, a second area 73a2, a third area 73a3, and a fourth area 73a4 obtained by dividing the hold display area 73a into four substantially horizontally. That is, in the hold display area 73a, the first area 73a1 to the fourth area 73a4 are provided in order from the left end to the right end. In the first area 73a1, the special figure 1 variable display is generated first based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold, which is generated first among the reserved special figure 1 hold. A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 73a2 to the fourth area 73a4, the second figure is generated second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 hold, and based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold on which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed second to fourth. In the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 73a1 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in hold order 1". Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second area 73a2, the third area 73a3, and the fourth area 73a4 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in hold order 2", "hold order 3 Special Figure 1 Hold "and" Special Figure 1 Hold in Hold Order 4 ". That is, the existing special figure 1 hold is referred to as “holding order 1” to “holding order 4” in the order of occurrence.

  Further, the variable display area 74a is formed on the left side of the hold display area 73a. In the fluctuation display area 74a, a fluctuation icon representing the special figure 1 fluctuation display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation display area 74a is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 73a. Strictly speaking, it is a “hold effect” corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. Is not included, but the display of the hold icon and the display of the change icon are related, so in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the change icon are collectively referred to as “hold effect”. . Further, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are collectively referred to as “icon”.

  In FIG. 21A, the hold display area 73a and the fluctuation display area 74a are clearly indicated by broken lines, but this is shown to represent the ranges of the hold display area 73a and the fluctuation display area 74a. Not actually displayed. In addition, the description of the following hold effect and the challenge effect to V, which will be described later, does not describe the hold display area 73a and the fluctuation display area 74a.

  Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be described. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 fluctuation display is currently being performed (the special figure fluctuation effect is being produced), and the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is “2”. In this situation, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), in the first area 73a1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first in the special figure 1 hold currently held (the order of the hold). The hold icon HA2 representing the 1 special figure 1 hold) is displayed, and the special figure 1 hold (holding order 2) generated next to the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA2 in the above-described second area 73a2 (not shown). The hold icon HA3 representing the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. In addition, in the above-described fluctuation display area 74a (not shown), a fluctuation icon HA1 representing the special figure 1 fluctuation display currently being executed is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 21B is a normal mode.

  Thus, in the hold effect, the special figure 1 is displayed side by side from the left end of the hold display area 73a in the order in which the hold is generated. That is, the variable display of the special symbol that is being held, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special figure-related random number stored in the special diagram holding storage unit 85 is individually displayed with the hold icon. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21C, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the variation icon HA1 representing the special diagram variation display being executed until just before that is erased. When the special symbol variable display (special drawing variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 73a1 moves to the variable display area 74a (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 73a2 is the first area 73a1 (not shown). Move to. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are shifted one by one to the left. This is because the special symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3 is the first special figure 1 hold that is generated first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is because the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are adapted to the current situation in accordance with the special map variable display to be started next.

  Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the fluctuation display area 74a represents the special figure 1 fluctuation display being executed, it becomes the fluctuation icon HA2 when displayed in the fluctuation display area 74a. That is, as a word that precedes the “icon”, the icon displayed in the hold display area 73a is “hold”, and the icon displayed in the change display area 74a is “change”. In other words, when the start condition of the special symbol variable display is established for the special figure hold indicated by the hold icon when the hold icon is displayed, the special symbol variable display related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as a variable icon. Further, when the icon changes from the hold icon to the change icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the hold display area 73a to the change display area 74a, the icon is enlarged about twice.

  Then, when a game ball is won at the first starting port 20 and a special figure 1 hold is generated from this situation, as shown in FIG. The icon HA4 is displayed in the second area 73a2 (not shown).

  By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the success / failure information and the special figure variation pattern information. Then, the sub-control board 90 executes the hold effect based on the start winning command, but whether to display the hold icon in the normal mode or in the special mode based on the success / failure information and the special figure variation pattern information. judge. Displaying the hold icon in a special manner is called “hold change notice”. The pending change notice is an effect (so-called “prefetching effect”) that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot from the previous stage where the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. The sub-control board 90 changes the display mode of the hold icon to a special mode with a predetermined probability based on the success / failure information and the special map variation pattern information. In this way, if the display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, the player can have an expectation that he may win a big win with a variable display of a special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. In the first embodiment, there are three types of effects for the pending change notice. Next, the pending change notice will be described. As a specific example of the hold change notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG.

  As one type of hold change notice, a special mode is set immediately after the hold icon is displayed. There is a pending change notice type. For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the game ball wins the first starting port 20 from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 21 (D)), and the special figure 1 is held. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the hold icon HA4 of the normal mode (white in FIG. 22 (B)) is displayed in the second area 73a2 (not shown) as described above in accordance with the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (C), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 22 (C)). ) In the example of FIG. 22, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in a normal mode for a moment immediately after display, but may be displayed in a special mode to eliminate the period of display in the normal mode.

  As a type of the next hold change notice, there is a hold change notice type that becomes a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, a hold change notice is performed when the special figure 1 hold is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), the game ball wins the first starting port 20 from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 21 (D)), and the special figure 1 is held. 23B, as shown in FIG. 23B, in accordance with the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold, the hold icon HA4 of the normal mode (white in FIG. 23B) is the second area 73a2 (not shown) described above. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 23C, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the variation icon HA2 representing the special diagram variation display being executed until immediately before that is erased. Subsequently, when the special symbol variable display (special drawing variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold indicated by the hold icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 23 (D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 73a1. The hold icon HA3 moves to the fluctuation display area 74a (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 73a2 moves to the first area 73a1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 73a2 to the first area 73a1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 23D) (holding change notice is performed). ).

  As the next type of hold change notice, in other words, when the hold icon has stagnated at a predetermined position, in other words, after the special icon change display has started, after the hold icon has moved, an action is taken from another image. There is a pending change notice type that becomes a special mode by receiving. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), the game ball wins the first starting port 20 from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 21 (D)), and the special figure 1 is held. 24B, as shown in FIG. 24B, the hold icon HA4 of the normal mode (white in FIG. 24B) is displayed in the second region 73a2 (not shown) described above according to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 24C, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the variation icon HA2 representing the special diagram variation display being executed until just before that is erased. Subsequently, when a special variable variable display (special drawing variation effect) is started on the basis of the special figure 1 hold indicated by the hold icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 24 (D), it is displayed in the first area 73a1. The held icon HA3 that has been moved moves to the fluctuation display area 74a (not shown), and the held icon HA4 that is displayed in the second area 73a2 moves to the first area 73a1 (not shown).

  When one second has elapsed since the start of the new special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (E), an image G1 representing a small flying object (small flying object image) is displayed around the upper right corner of the display unit 7a. G1) appears and moves to the left in the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (F), when the small flying object image G1 approaches the area immediately above the holding icon HA4, an image representing a flash from the small flying object image G1 toward the holding icon HA4. (Flash image G2) is fired. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (G), when the flash image G2 collides with the hold icon HA4, the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 24D) ( As shown in FIG. 24H, the small flying object image G1 fades out from the upper left corner of the display unit 7a.

  As described above, the hold change notice type in which the hold change notice is made when the special figure 1 hold occurs (at the time of winning), the hold change notice type in which the hold change notice is made in the case of the special figure 1 hold shift, and the special figure There is a hold change notice type that is performed after the movement of the hold icon after the change display is started. In the following, the hold change notice made at the time of winning will be called the hold change notice at the time of winning, the hold change notice made at the time of shifting will be called the hold change notice at the time of shift, and the hold change notice made after the shift will end This is called a notice.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the small flying object image G1 appears and moves to the left in the horizontal direction as in the case of the change pending notice, but the flash image G2 is not fired and displayed. It may fade out from the upper left corner of the portion 7a. That is, although the small flying object image G1 appears, there is a case where the pending change notice is not performed during the change. Accordingly, the change pending notice of change is not always performed only by the appearance of the small flying object image G1. Thus, by making the small flying object image G1 appear, the player's sense of expectation for the pending change notice can be enhanced. In the following, an effect that suggests that a small flying object image G1 appears, moves to the left in the horizontal direction to the position where the flash image G2 is to be fired, and there is a possibility that a pending change notice may be performed. It is also referred to as “a sign of change. In addition, the fact that the change sign indication was performed but the change pending notice was not performed is also referred to as “change pending change notice”.

4-3. Next, the challenge effect to V that can be executed in the normal effect mode will be described. The challenge effect to V can be executed in the normal effect mode, and in the normal game state (non-time-short state) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the short-time state, finally the effect toward the small wins by special drawing 2 lottery, In other words, it is an effect that gives expectation to the execution of the V passing small hit game. The challenge presentation to V is mainly composed of the first half of the challenge presentation to V performed earlier and the second half of the challenge presentation to V executed after the first half of challenge presentation to V. The contents of the first half of the production of the challenge for V are related to the contents of the production of the second half of the production of the challenge to V. The first half of the challenge production to V is triggered by the FPS2 (winning symbol A) common symbol fluctuation display or FHP3 (winning symbol B) normal symbol fluctuation display. This is an effect (the effect of applying the long opening of the electric Chu 23) as to whether or not the corresponding auxiliary game (long opening auxiliary game) can be executed. In the second half of the challenge production for V, the special game 2 variable display performed when the game ball enters the electric Chu 23 in the auxiliary game according to the winning symbol A is basically used. This is an effect of whether or not it can be executed (effect with V passing). Here, with reference to FIG. 25, an effect flow of a challenge effect to V will be described.

  In the first half of the production of the challenge to V, FHP2 (winning symbol A) is a normal map change display or FHP3 (winning symbol B) is a normal figure change display (hereinafter, these normal figure change displays are referred to as “specific normal figure change display”). It is done when it is being performed, but when the specific map change display is started, before the first half of the challenge presentation to V is performed, in other words, whether or not the challenge presentation to V is executed For example, a precursor effect (with a challenge effect on V) is suggested, which suggests that a challenge effect on V may be executed. In addition, if a precursor effect is performed with the start of the specific map fluctuation display, a challenge effect to V is always performed after that, but the precursor effect is accompanied by the start of the normal A loss fluctuation or the normal B loss fluctuation. Is also executed. However, in this case, the challenge effect to V is not executed after the precursor effect. That is, even if the precursor effect is performed, the challenge effect to V is not always executed. It is clear that if the challenge effect to V is always performed after the sign effect, the challenge effect to V will be performed by executing the sign effect. This is because the effect is reduced. In the following, the sign effect that is executed even when the normal A loss change or the normal B loss change is started, and after which the challenge effect to V is not performed, is referred to as “prediction effect gusset”.

  When the first half of the challenge production to V is performed after the sign production, the first challenge production is performed first. The first challenge directing is an effect of whether or not the first challenge can be cleared (whether the first challenge succeeds or fails). If the first challenge is successful, it is possible to proceed to the latter half of the challenge production for V. If the first challenge fails, it is not possible to proceed to the second half of the challenge presentation to V, and the challenge production to V is ended. The first half of the challenge presentation to V (successful first half of the challenge to V) was performed in FHP2's usual figure fluctuation display in which the electric Chu 23 opens long after the usual figure fluctuation display. The first half of the challenge production to V (first challenge failure to V) will be performed in the normal fluctuation display of FHP3 in which the electric Chu 23 opens short circuit later.

  When the first challenge production is completed in the first half success of the challenge production to V, the electric chew launch promotion effect is then performed to urge the game ball to be fired toward the electric chew 23. This is to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to open the electric Chu 23 for a long time because the electric Chu 23 opens long after the start of the electric Chu launch promotion effect (the long opening auxiliary game is performed). In addition, although the electric chew launch promotion effect is performed in the usual figure variation display of FHP2 (winning symbol A), it is also performed in the long opening assist game performed after the usual figure variation display. In other words, the electric chew launch promotion effect is performed on the FHP2 (winning symbol A) general symbol change display and the long opening assist game. In other words, the electric chew launch promotion effect starts before the FHP2 (winning symbol A) universal symbol change display ends, and ends in the middle of the long opening assist game.

  In a long opening assist game, if a game ball cannot enter the electric chew 23, an electric chew non-winning effect corresponding to the inability to enter the ball is performed, and the first half of the challenge to V (Challenge to V Production) ends.

  In a long opening assist game, when a game ball enters the electric Chu 23, a special figure 2 variable display is executed based on the incoming ball, and the second half of the challenge effect to V is performed according to the special figure 2 variable display. Is called. Between the first half of the challenge production for V and the second half of the challenge production for V, a joint production for connecting the productions is performed. The bridging effect is composed of the bridging effect during the auxiliary game that is performed first, and the special billing 1 variation bridging effect that can be executed after the bridging effect during the auxiliary game.

  The connection effect during the auxiliary game is performed when a game ball enters the electric Chu 23, and is performed until the long opening auxiliary game is completed. Special figure 1 fluctuation connection effect is performed until the start condition of special figure 2 fluctuation display is satisfied after the long opening assist game is finished. Special figure 2 variable display start condition is that special figure 1 variable display and special game is not being performed, or special figure 1 variable display that is currently being executed when special figure 1 hold number is 1 or more It is to be. In addition, if the start condition of the special figure 2 variable display is satisfied before the long opening assist game is finished, the special figure 2 variable display is started immediately after the game ball enters the electric Chu 23. The connection effect during the auxiliary game and the connection effect during the special figure 1 change are not performed.

  When the second half of the challenge production for V is performed, the last challenge production is performed first. The last challenge production is a production of whether or not the last challenge can be cleared (basically) whether or not the last challenge is successful (whether the last challenge succeeds or fails). If the last challenge (last challenge) is successful, a small hit game is performed. Therefore, a VAT launch promotion effect that promotes the launch of a game ball to the VAT 33 is performed, and the second half of the challenge effect to V is completed. If the last challenge fails, the latter half of the challenge production for V will end with the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display, and the case where the revival challenge production will be performed immediately without the special figure 2 fluctuation display being completed. Branch to

  In the Resurrection Challenge Direction, it is the direction of whether or not the last challenge can be cleared (whether the last challenge succeeds or fails). When the last challenge is really successful, a small hit game is performed, so the VAT launch promotion effect is performed and the second half of the challenge effect to V is finished. If the last challenge is unsuccessful, the second half of the challenge production to V is completed as the special figure 2 variable display ends.

  In this way, in the latter half of the challenge production for V, there are successes and failures in the last challenge, but the challenge to V that ultimately succeeds in the last challenge, regardless of the presence or absence of the revival challenge production. The latter half of the performance is referred to as “successful second half of the challenge to V”, and the second half of the second challenge to V that ultimately fails the last challenge is referred to as “the second half of the challenge to V challenge failure”. Also, success in the second half of the directing of the challenge to V where the reviving challenge is not performed is called “successful second half of the directing of the challenge to normal V”, and success in the second half of the directing of the challenge to V where the reviving challenge is performed is referred to as “resurrection. It is called "Succeeding second half of the challenge production to V". Failure in the latter half of the challenge production to V where the revival challenge production is not performed is referred to as “second half of the challenge production to normal V”, and failure in the second half of the challenge production to V in which the revival challenge production is performed is referred to as “Revival V” The second half of the challenge production failed. The latter half of the challenge direction to V where the revival challenge production is not performed is referred to as "the latter half of the challenge production to normal V", and the second half of the challenge production to V where the revival challenge production is performed is referred to as "Challenge production to the revival V" The latter half is called. Then, success in the latter half of the challenge production for V is performed with the special figure 2 fluctuation display of the big hit fluctuation or the small hit fluctuation, and failure in the second half of the challenge presentation for V is performed with the special figure 2 fluctuation display of the loss fluctuation.

  As described above, the first stage presentation and the first half of the challenge presentation are performed in the normal map variation display and the auxiliary game, and the second half of the challenge presentation to the V is performed in the special figure 2 variation display. The portion in which the normal map change display is performed in the first half of the performance is also referred to as a “normal map change effect”, and the portion in which the auxiliary game is performed in the first half of the challenge to V is also referred to as “auxiliary game effect”. The latter half of the challenge to V is also referred to as “special figure 2 fluctuation effect”.

  Next, a specific example of a challenge to V will be described. As a premise of a concrete example of the challenge effect to V, it is assumed that the game proceeds (various events occur) as shown in the time chart of FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), the special figure 1 fluctuation display is being performed (the special figure 1 fluctuation display (1) in FIG. 37), and accordingly, the daytime normal background image G100 is superimposed and produced. It is assumed that the variation display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the variation display of small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed and the variation icon HA1 is displayed. Further, it is assumed that the special figure 1 hold number is 3, and the normal hold icons HA2 to HA4 are displayed. Furthermore, at this time, it is assumed that the normal map variable display and the auxiliary game are not executed. Further, it is assumed that the special figure 1 determination result relating to the icons HA1 to HA4 is “no reach loss”.

  In this situation, if the game ball passes through the left gate 281, a general drawing lottery is performed, and a normal variation display is started. If the result of the general drawing lottery here is a winning A or a winning B, a precursor effect is performed at the same time as the start of the normal map change display. As described above, the precursor effect is an effect in which a challenge to V is applied. When the precursor effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 26B, the display unit 7a switches from the daytime normal background image G100 to the first indicator image G110 for precursor effect dedicated to the precursor effect, The production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the icons HA1 to HA4 are not displayed. In addition to the first background image G110 for the sign effect, a title image G9 bordering a character representing the title associated with the challenge effect to V, “Challenge to V”, is displayed. In addition, although the aspect of the 1st background image G110 for precursor effects is set suitably, in 1st Embodiment, it is comprised with the red monochrome background. The title image G9 is white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 26C, in the precursor effect, a second precursor effect dedicated to another precursor effect different from the first background image G110 for precursor effect, instead of the first background image G110 for precursor effect. A background image G111 is displayed. In other words, the first background image G110 for sign effect is switched to the second background image G111 for sign effect. In addition, although the aspect of the 2nd background image G111 for a precursor effect is set suitably, in 1st Embodiment, it is comprised with the blue monochromatic background.

  In addition, a horizontally elongated reduced screen image G10 is displayed in a superimposed manner on the second background image G111 for sign production on the display unit 7a, and is displayed on the display unit 7a until just before that in the reduced screen image G10. The first background image G110 for sign production is displayed. That is, with the display of the reduced screen image G10, it appears as if the first background image G110 for sign production has moved into the reduced screen image G10. In the drawing process here, the reduced screen image G10 and the first background image G110 for the sign effect are displayed in a layer (upper layer side) higher than the second background image G111 for the sign effect and the title image G9. In other words, the second background image G111 for the sign effect and the title image G9 are not drawn (displayed) without the range of the reduced screen image G10 and the first background image G110 for the sign effect, but instead of the reduced screen image G10. On the lower layer side, something is also drawn (displayed) in the range of the reduced screen image G10 and the first background image G110 for indication effect. As a result, the overlapping range of the second background image G111 for precursor effect and the reduced screen image G10 of the title image G9 and the first background image G110 for precursor effect is hidden by the reduced screen image G10 and the first background image G110 for precursor effect. Yes.

  Thus, by displaying the reduced screen image G10, a part of the display unit 7a displayed in the reduced screen image G10 and a lower layer side of the reduced screen image G10 in the display unit 7a. Two display portions, that is, a portion displayed in the range, are formed. Hereinafter, a portion displayed in the reduced screen image G10 is referred to as a “special region”, and a portion displayed in the entire range of the display unit 7a on the lower layer side of the reduced screen image G10 is referred to as a “normal region”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the reduced screen image G10 including the first effect rendering first background image G110 is reduced from the state shown in FIG. 26 (C) while moving so as to be sucked to the lower left corner. . At this time, the title image G9 gradually appears as the reduced screen image G10 including the first effect rendering first background image G110 is reduced. Then, after the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 including the first background image G110 for the sign effect progresses by a predetermined degree (for example, a degree (a fraction) of the title image G9 appears), the challenge effect to V is performed. Branches to whether to execute. That is, the point in time when the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 has progressed by a predetermined amount becomes a branching point as to whether or not the challenge effect to V is executed after the precursor effect.

  Here, when the challenge effect to V is executed, after the state shown in FIG. 26 (D), as shown in FIG. 27 (A-1), the first background image G110 for the sign effect is included. The reduction of the reduced screen image G10 proceeds at a stroke to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the bordered inner side of the title image G9 is painted in red. An image G11 for notifying that the challenge effect for V is executed (entering the challenge effect for V) (V challenge effect execution notification image G11: “Challenge to V” in FIG. 27B-1)) Is displayed. The reduction of the reduced screen image G10 progresses to such an extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears, and the display of the challenge effect execution notification image G11 for V causes the challenge effect to V to be executed (to V). To enter the challenge effect) (the challenge effect execution notification effect to V) is configured.

  On the other hand, when the challenge effect to V is not executed, that is, when the precursor effect that is being executed is the precursor effect, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed on the right as a whole after the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27 (A-2), after the reduced screen image G10 has completely covered the entire range of the display unit 7a, the daytime normal background image G100 and effects are finally displayed. The symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and icons HA1 to HA4 are displayed. That is, the display unit 7a returns to the original normal state from the special state in which the special region and the normal region are formed. An effect of notifying that the enlargement of the reduced screen image G10 including the first background image G110 for the sign effect (end of the special state of the display unit 7a) was the sign effect gaze (a sign effect gaze notification effect) In other words, an effect (a challenge effect non-execution notification effect for V) for notifying that the challenge effect for V is not executed (does not enter the challenge effect for V) is configured. In the specific example described here, since the special figure 1 variation display is performed at the timing when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 appear, the displayed effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 also vary.

  After the sign staging effect is over, the staging proceeds as usual (as in the case where the sign staging is not performed). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), at the timing of the stop display of the loss special figure, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating stop without reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the variation icon HA1 is deleted, and with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the special figure 1 fluctuation display (2) in FIG. 37), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small The symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, and the icons HA1 to HA4 are shifted to the left by one.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 26B to 26D, from the appearance of the reduced screen image G10 to the branch point where the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 has progressed to a predetermined extent that hides a part of the title image G9. Constitutes a precursor. Further, the state in which the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 as shown in FIG. 26D has progressed by a predetermined amount is maintained for a predetermined time (2 seconds in the first embodiment). By this maintenance, the reduced screen image G10 is further reduced, and it is sought whether or not it is possible to enter a challenge to V.

  When the challenge effect execution notification effect to V is performed, the challenge effect to V, more specifically, the first challenge effect in the first half of the challenge effect to V is entered. When the first challenge effect is entered, the background image G112 dedicated to the first challenge effect (the first challenge background image G112) is switched from the second background image G111 for the sign effect. In addition, when entering the first half of the challenge production for V, first, an image G12 (first challenge content explanation image G12: FIG. “Change to First Challenge Logo” ”is displayed on the display unit 7a. In the first embodiment, as the first challenge, it is set that the main character “logo” is transformed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27C-1, the main character “logo” that has not been transformed is displayed in the first challenge background image G112.

  The first challenge content explanation image G12 is displayed in a plurality of types of colors. As the colors, red, green and white are set. The color representing the first challenge content explanation image G12 constitutes an effect mode (effect pattern: first challenge effect pattern) of the first challenge effect. The color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is the degree of expectation that the first challenge will be successful, in other words, the degree of expectation that the symbol A will be a normal variation display (the degree of expectation for the execution of the long opening assist game) ). The degree of expectation for the execution of the long opening assist game suggested by the color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is higher in the order of red> green> white.

  Here, when the first half of the challenge production to V is started, on the condition that the special figure 1 hold number ≧ 1 or the special figure 1 hold number = 0 and the special figure 1 variable display is in progress, The reduced screen image G10 displayed on the display unit 7a during the challenge effect execution notification effect to V is continuously displayed (a special region is continuously formed). However, in the reduced screen image G10, after the challenge effect to V is started, the special figure variation effect and the hold effect that are performed on the display unit 7a when the challenge effect to V is not performed are performed. . The special figure variation effect here does not include variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 according to the special figure 1 variable display. The variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 corresponding to the special symbol 1 variable display is not affected by the effect during the indication effect and the challenge effect to V, and in the special symbol corresponding small symbol region 71a. Executed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), in the reduced screen image G10 which is a special area, the variable designs of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the icons HA2 to HA4 are displayed on the normal daytime background image G100. Is done. That is, when the second half of the challenge effect for V is started, the display of the normal daytime background image G100, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the display of the icons HA2 to HA4 are in a reduced state than before the start of the sign effect. Done. In the normal area, the first half of the challenge effect to V according to the normal map change display is performed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 according to the special figure 1 variable display are variably displayed. Although not shown, in the special figure fluctuation effect, in addition to the special figure fluctuation effect by the image, the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound output from the speaker 67 according to the special figure fluctuation display, a frame lamp The special figure variation effect by light emission emitted from 66 is also executed as appropriate. Then, when the sign effect is started during the special figure change effect, the sign effect effect by voice or light emission and the first half of the challenge effect to V are appropriately changed from the special figure change effect by voice or light emission according to the normal figure change display. Done. In other words, for the voice production and the light production, from the voice production and the light production for the special figure fluctuation production according to the special figure fluctuation display, the normal figure fluctuation production according to the normal figure fluctuation display (the first half of the sign production / the challenge production to V ) For voice production and light production. In the first embodiment, a warning effect by voice or light emission is executed, and the voice or light emission is switched from the special figure changing effect to the warning effect at the start of the warning effect, but the warning effect by voice or light emission is executed. First, the special figure variation effect by voice and light emission is executed until the first half of the challenge production for V starts, and the voice and light emission at the start of the first half of the challenge production for V You may make it switch to.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (D-1), after the first challenge content explanation image G12 is deleted, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the main character “logo” in the first challenge background image G112 is displayed. An effect that draws attention is attached. As described above, after the effect that focuses attention on the main character “logo” in the background image G112 for the first challenge is applied, it is determined whether the first challenge succeeds or fails (the result of the first challenge is notified). ) In other words, the point in time when the effect in which attention is directed to the main character “logo” is applied becomes a branching point of whether the first challenge succeeds or fails.

  Here, when the first challenge is successful, specifically, when the protagonist character “logo” transforms, in other words, when the normal drawing lottery result is hit A (FTP2 general map change display) 28 (B-1), the main character “logo” in the first challenge background image G112 has been transformed, and as shown in FIG. 28 (C-1), the first challenge has succeeded (the main character “ An image G13 (first challenge success notification image G13) indicating that the “logo” has been transformed) is displayed. The display of the first challenge success notification image G13 constitutes an effect (first challenge success notification effect) for notifying that the first challenge related to the first half of the challenge effect to V is successful.

  On the other hand, if the first challenge fails, specifically, if the protagonist character “logo” does not transform, in other words, if the standard drawing lottery result is B (FTP3 standard map display), As shown in FIG. 28 (B-2), the main character “logo” in the first challenge background image G112 is not transformed, and the reduced screen image G10 is diagonally rightward as a whole as shown in FIG. 28 (C-2). It expands upward. Finally, as shown in FIG. 28 (D-2), the reduced screen image G10 disappears while covering the entire range of the display unit 7a. In other words, the special area gradually erodes the normal area, and eventually replaces the normal area and disappears. Thus, the enlargement of the reduced screen image G10 constitutes an effect (first challenge failure notification effect) for notifying that the first challenge related to the first half of the challenge effect to V is a failure. In addition, while the first challenge failure notification effect is being performed, the special screen variation effect and the hold effect other than the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed in the reduced screen image G10 (special region).

  Further, in the specific example described here, the stop special figure is stopped and displayed in the situation of FIG. 28 (B-1) or FIG. 28 (B-2), and the reduced screen image G10 ( In the special area of the display unit 7a), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss without reach are stopped and the variation icon HA2 is deleted. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C-1) or FIG. 28 (C-2), with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the special figure 1 fluctuation display (3) in FIG. 37), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ1. The change display of EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts, and the icons HA3 to HA4 are shifted to the left by one.

  After the first challenge success notification effect, an auxiliary game (long opening auxiliary game) corresponding to the winning symbol A is performed, so that the player does not fail to enter the game ball into the electric Chu 23 (player) In order not to miss the opportunity to acquire game profits), an effect (an electric chew launch promotion effect) that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the electric chew 23 is executed. When the electric chew launch promotion effect is started, the first challenge background image G112 is switched to the electric chew launch promotion effect background image G113.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (A), an image G14 (electric chew launch promotion image G14) that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the electric chew 23 is displayed in the electric chew launch promotion effect background image G14. The electric Chu launch promotion image G14 includes an image G141 (electric Chu launch trajectory image G141) representing a trajectory toward which the game ball is launched and heading toward the electric Chu 23, and an image G142 (electric Chu position) for clearly indicating the position of the electric Chu 23. The image G142), the image G143 (electricalchu aiming image G143) suggesting that the target to be entered (the aim of launching the game ball) is the electric chew 23, and right-handed to enter the electric chew 23 And an image G144 for notifying that it is necessary (right-handed notification image G144 for electric Chu).

  The electric Chu launch promotion effect is performed from the usual figure display to the auxiliary game. Specifically, the electric chew launch promotion effect is started from a predetermined time (four seconds in the first embodiment) before the normal fluctuation display ends, and the game ball is placed on the electric che 23 during the normal fluctuation display. The firing trajectory image G141 is displayed so as to trace the trajectory moving toward. When the auxiliary game is started, in addition to the electric chew launch trajectory image G141, an electric chew position image G142, an electric chew aiming image G143, and a right-handed notification image G144 are displayed.

  Although not shown in the figure, while the electric chew launch promotion effect is being performed, the stop special figure is displayed and then the special figure 1 fluctuation display (see the special figure 1 fluctuation display (2 in FIG. 37). )) 3 is started. Therefore, while the electric chew launch promotion effect is being performed, in the special area of the display unit 7a, along with the stop display of the loss special drawing, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the loss without reach is performed. The variation icon HA2 is deleted, and with the start of the special figure 1 variation display, the variation designs EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed, and the icons HA3 to HA4 are shifted to the left by one. In addition, in the normal area of the display unit 7a, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss without reach are stopped along with the stop display of the special figure of the loss, and the small figure is displayed along with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display. The symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, and the icons HA3 to HA4 are shifted to the left by one.

  Then, when a game ball enters the electric Chu 23 by a predetermined time (3 seconds in the first embodiment) before the auxiliary game ends, the execution of the special figure 2 determination and the special figure 2 variable display is confirmed. Therefore, as an effect of connecting until the next effect is performed, a connection effect during the auxiliary game is performed until the end of the auxiliary game.

  When the transition effect during the auxiliary game is performed, the background image G113 for the promotion effect during the promotion of the electric chew is switched to the background image G114 for the transition effect during the auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 29 (B-1), the background image G114 for connecting effects during the auxiliary game is configured so that the entire screen is dim compared to the background images G100 to G102 for normal use, the background image G112 for first challenge, and the like. The protagonist character “Logo” transformed into the dim screen is displayed. In addition, in the connection effect during the auxiliary game, the game ball has entered the electric Chu 23 on the background image G114 for the connection effect during the auxiliary game in order to notify that the game ball has entered the electric queue 23. Image G15 (electric chew ball notification image G15: “Standby OK” in FIG. 29B-1) is displayed. The display of the background image for connection effect during the auxiliary game G114 and the display of the electric chew incoming ball notification image G15 constitute the connection effect during the auxiliary game.

  If a game ball has not entered the electric chew 23 before a predetermined time (3 seconds in the first embodiment) before the auxiliary game ends, special figure 2 determination and special figure 2 variable display are performed at that time. As shown in FIG. 29 (B-2), at the time when the auxiliary game is over a predetermined time (3 seconds in the first embodiment), as shown in FIG. Switching from the image G113 to the background image G114 for connecting effects during the auxiliary game, the transformed main character “logo” is displayed. That is, a part of the connection effect during the auxiliary game is performed.

  If a game ball does not enter the electric chew 23 for a predetermined time (3 seconds in the first embodiment) until the auxiliary game ends, as shown in FIG. 29 (C-2), the auxiliary game is being played. The reduced screen image G10 expands diagonally to the upper right as a whole from the transformed main character “logo”, which is part of the connection effect. Finally, as shown in FIG. 29D-2, the reduced screen image G10 disappears while covering the entire range of the display unit 7a. In other words, the special area gradually erodes the normal area, eventually replaces the normal area, and disappears progressively. Such enlargement of the reduced screen image G10 is an effect of notifying that the game ball could not enter the electric chew 23 in the auxiliary game corresponding to the winning symbol A (long opening auxiliary game) (electrical chew non-winning effect) Is configured.

  If a game ball enters the electric chew 23 during a predetermined time (3 seconds) until the auxiliary game ends, the electric chew ball notification image G15 is superimposed on the background image G114 for connection effect during the auxiliary game. Is displayed (see FIG. 29B-1). That is, the connection effect during the auxiliary game is completed.

  In the specific example described here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display is continuously executed at the end of the auxiliary game (the special figure 1 fluctuation display (4) in FIG. 37), the auxiliary game is finished. The special figure 2 determination and special figure 2 variable display cannot be executed immediately. When the special figure 1 variable display is performed at the time when the auxiliary game is finished, the special figure 2 variable display is executed from the time when the auxiliary game is finished until the special figure 1 variable display is finished. Until the next special figure 2 variable display, the special figure 1 change during the transition to the second half of the challenge effect to V will be performed. As described above, when the special figure 1 variable display is not performed at the time when the auxiliary game is finished, the transition effect during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (A), when the special figure 1 changing connection effect is started, the special illustration 1 changing connection effect background is displayed from the auxiliary game intermediate connection effect background image G114 in the normal area of the display unit 7a. While switching to the image G115, an image G16 (a special image 2 variable display standby notification image G16) for notifying that the special image 2 variable display is on standby is displayed. It should be noted that in the special image 1 fluctuating connecting effect background image G115, an image in which the transforming main character “logo” and the enemy character face each other is displayed. Then, the special figure 1 variable display is finished, and as shown in FIG. 30A, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the special area, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the normal area. When the change icon HA4 is erased, the transition effect during the special figure 1 change ends, and the challenge challenge to V in the latter half, specifically, the last challenge effect is started.

  When the special figure 1 variable display is switched to the special figure 2 variable display and the second half of the challenge effect to V is started, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the second half of the challenge effect to V according to the special figure 2 variable display. Is performed in the normal area, the reduced screen image G10 is deleted. That is, the display unit 7a substantially returns from the special state having the special region and the normal region to the normal state. However, during the second half of the challenge production for V, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are not displayed. Since the special figure 2 variable display is started, the display positions of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are moved from the special symbol 1 corresponding small symbol region 71a to the special symbol 2 corresponding small symbol region 72a. That is, in the second half of the challenge effect for V, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed in the special symbol 2 corresponding small symbol region 72a.

  Furthermore, when the last challenge effect that constitutes the latter half of the challenge effect for V is started, the display unit 7a starts the background image G116 dedicated to the last challenge effect from the background image G115 for transition effect during the special figure 1 change (for the last challenge). The background image G116) is switched to. Also, an image G17 (notification image G17 for the second half of the challenge effect execution notification image V) notifying that the second half of the challenge effect for V has been executed (entered in the second half of the challenge effect for V) is superimposed on the background image G116 for the last challenge. Displayed.

  Then, in the second half of the challenge production for V, as shown in FIG. 30C, an image G18 for explaining the content of the last challenge, which is the production content of the last challenge production (last challenge content explanation image G18: FIG. 30). In (C), “Let's defeat the last challenge enemy character”) is displayed on the display unit 7a, and as shown in FIG. 30D, in the last challenge background image G116, a girl character introducing the last challenge, The enemy character that is the opponent of the hero character is displayed. As the final challenge, the main character “logo” is set to succeed or lose an enemy character. In addition, the display of the girl character and the enemy character shown in FIG. 30D constitutes a last challenge effect introduction part (last challenge introduction effect).

  In the last challenge background image G116, the battle between the hero character “logo” and the enemy character is unfolded. As shown in FIG. 31A, when the enemy character is attacked by the hero character “logo”, The enemy character is divided into a case where it is defeated and a case where it is not defeated. That is, the scene in which the enemy character shown in FIG. 31A is attacked by the main character “logo” constitutes a branch point for whether the last challenge succeeds or fails.

  Here, although not shown, a plurality of types of attacks are set as attacks on the enemy character of the hero character. As the attack, an attack with a sword, an attack with a spear, and an attack with a punch are set. The content of this attack constitutes an effect mode (effect pattern: last challenge effect pattern) of the last challenge effect. And the content of the attack of the hero character in the last challenge production suggests the degree of expectation to succeed in the last challenge, in other words, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game (special game execution expectation). The expectation of special game execution suggested by the content of the attack is higher in the order of sword> 槍> punch.

  And if the last challenge is successful, V passing small hit game is performed after that, and as shown in FIG. 31 (B-1), an image G19 (V passing implied image G19) that implies V passing is obtained. As shown in FIG. 31 (C-1), an image G20 (last challenge success notification image G20) for notifying the success or failure of the enemy character and the success of the last challenge is displayed. The display of the V-passing implied image G19 and the last challenge success notification image G20 constitutes an effect (last challenge success notification effect) for notifying that the last challenge was successful. Subsequently, since the V passing small hit game is performed, in order not to miss that the player enters the VAT 33 with the game ball, the image G21 suggesting that the player hits the right in advance (right strike prior suggested image G21: In FIG. 32 (A), “Now, ready for right-handed”) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the player does not fail to make the VAT 33 enter the game ball (player) In order not to miss the opportunity to acquire game profits), an effect (VAT launch promotion effect) that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the VAT 33 is executed. When the VAT launch promotion effect is started, the last challenge background image G116 is switched to the VAT launch promotion effect background image G117.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (B), in the VAT launch promotion effect background image G117, an image G22 (VAT launch promotion image G22) that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the VAT 33 is displayed. The VAT launch promotion image G22 includes an image G221 (VAT launch trajectory image G221) representing a trajectory toward which the game ball is launched and headed toward the VAT33, an image G222 (VAT position image G222) for clearly indicating the position of the VAT33, and the incoming ball An image G223 (VAT aiming image G223) that suggests that the target to be played (aim for launching the game ball) is VAT33, and an image G224 (VAT for notifying that it is necessary to make a right strike to enter the VAT33) Right-handed notification image G224). In the VAT launch promotion effect, first, the VAT launch trajectory image G221 is displayed so as to trace the trajectory of the game ball moving toward the VAT 33, and then, in addition to the VAT launch trajectory image G221, the VAT position image G222, VAT aiming image G223, and VAT right-handed notification image G224 are displayed.

  Finally, the effect is switched from the VAT launch promotion effect to the effect of notifying the small hit game (small hit game rush effect). When the small hit game rush effect is started, the display unit 7a switches from the VAT launch promotion effect background image G117 to the background image G118 dedicated to the small hit game rush effect (small hit game rush effect background image 118). . An image G23 of a title representing a jackpot game that can be progressively executed from the small hit game (a big hit game title image G23: “BIG BONUS” in FIG. 32C) is displayed on the background image 118 for the small hit game entry effect. Is done.

  Here, the VAT launch promotion effect and the small hit game entry effect are performed in the special figure 2 stop display. Therefore, the VAT launch promotion effect starts with the start of the special figure 2 stop display, and the small hit game entry effect ends with the end of the special figure 2 stop display. Therefore, while the VAT launch promotion effect and the small hit game entry effect are being performed, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the small hits are stopped and displayed (FIGS. 32B to 32C). reference).

  On the other hand, if the last challenge is unsuccessful, as shown in FIG. 31 (B-2), an enemy character standing in the standing and standing in the last challenge background image G116 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 33A, blackout occurs for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Then, after this blackout, the effect is developed in two patterns. It should be noted that the display of the enemy character standing as a king constitutes an effect (last challenge failure notification effect) for notifying that the last challenge has failed.

  As the first pattern, after blackout (FIG. 33 (A)), as shown in FIG. 33 (B-1), temporary stop display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a loss is performed. As shown in (C-1), the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss are performed. That is, since the special figure 2 variable display is ended, the second half of the challenge effect to V is ended. As the second pattern, a revival challenge effect is performed after blackout (FIG. 33A). The revival challenge effect is an effect in which the last challenge is once again made after the last challenge is failed and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the loss are displayed. That is, since the special figure 2 variable display continues, the second half of the challenge effect to V does not end. When the revival challenge production is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (B-2), in the last challenge background image G116, in the phrase (FIG. 33 (B-2)) Please! ") Is displayed, the last challenge introduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 33 (C-2), and the number of the last challenge to be performed next is shown as shown in FIG. 33 (D-2). The displayed image G24 (last challenge number notification image G24) is displayed, and the second challenge effect is performed. Here, since it is the revival challenge production in the second half of the challenge production to V for the first time, the number of times of the last challenge is the second time, and the last challenge number notification image G24 represents “second time” (FIG. 33 (D-2) "2ND"). This is because, for example, the special figure 1 variable display is not performed when the first entry into the second starting port 22 in the auxiliary game is performed, and the special figure 2 immediately after the entry is performed. When the variable display starts and the game ball enters the second start port 22 after the start of the auxiliary game, the special figure 2 hold occurs, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display is lost. This is because the second half of the challenge production for V will be held. When the 2nd last challenge production is performed, as in the case of the 1st last challenge production, the last challenge is succeeded, the last mission success notification production, the VAT launch promotion production, and the small hit game entry production. Are performed in order (FIG. 31 (B-1), FIG. 31 (C-1), FIG. 32 (A) to FIG. 32 (C)), or the design EZ1 showing the loss due to the last challenge failure ~ EZ3 temporary stop display, production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing a loss and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stop display is performed in order (FIG. 31 (B-2), FIG. 33 (B-1) to FIG. 33 (C-). 1)).

  Next, a description will be given of a presentation effect that is different from the above-described precursor effect. For example, in the situation shown in FIG. 26A described above, as shown in FIG. 34A, the small flying object image G1 appears from around the upper right corner of the display unit 7a and moves to the left in the horizontal direction. . Next, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), when the small flying object image G1 approaches the holding icon HA2, the flash image G2 is emitted from the small flying object image G1 toward the holding icon HA2. To do. That is, a pre-announcement effect is performed. Unlike the case of the hold effect, the flash image G2 stops as if it collided with something before the hold icon HA2. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), an image G25 (challenge effect suggestion image G25 to V: FIG. 34B) suggesting that a challenge effect to V is performed from the position where the flash image G2 stops. "Challenge to V") appears and moves to the right side of the hold display area 73a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35A, the display unit 7a switches from the daytime normal background image G100 to the second background image G111 for a prelude effect, and is reduced in a superimposed manner on the second background image G111 for a prelude effect. A screen image G10 is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the reduced screen image G10 is reduced while moving so as to be sucked to the lower left corner, and the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 proceeds to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears. The challenge effect execution notification image G11 for V is displayed so that the inner edge of the title image G9 is painted in red, and execution of the first half of the challenge effect for V is confirmed. Finally, as shown in FIG. 35 (C), the first half of the challenge to V is entered. In this way, there may be a case where a challenge effect to V is entered from a pending change notice. That is, the pre-change indication effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the pending change notice will be executed also constitutes an indication effect that indicates that the challenge effect to V may be executed.

  Further, in this case, the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 proceeds to a predetermined extent, stops once and is maintained for a predetermined time, and then further progresses to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears. However, the process proceeds to the end (to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears) in a short time and in a short time. This is because the above-described precursor effect is further reduced by maintaining the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 for a predetermined time after the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 has progressed to a predetermined level, and enters the first half of the challenge effect for V. On the other hand, the sign effect of this time is that the small flying object image G1 appears, so that the challenge effect suggestion image G25 for V appears and enters the first half of the challenge effect for V That's because I'm talking about no. Therefore, when the challenge effect suggesting image G25 for V appears, the first half of the challenge effect for V is always performed (see FIG. 35C), and the challenge effect suggesting image G25 for V is displayed as a challenge effect for V. An effect suggesting that it will be performed (a challenge effect suggestion effect for V) is formed. Also, in the specific example here, as shown in FIG. 35B, the reduction screen image G10 is reduced to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears, and a challenge effect execution notification image G11 for V is displayed. At that time, the special figure 1 stop display is performed, so that the special symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the lossless reach are displayed in the special area of the display unit 7a, and the reach is not performed in the normal area of the display unit 7a. The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss are displayed.

  In the following, when the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 has progressed to a predetermined level, the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 is maintained for a predetermined time, so that the reduction further proceeds and a sign of whether or not to enter the first half of the challenge production for V The effect is called “prediction effect A”, and a small flying object image G1 appears (executes a pre-announcement effect), so that a challenge effect suggestion image G25 for V appears and enters the first half of the challenge effect for V This is referred to as a precursor effect “predictor effect B”.

  In addition, as described above, there is a case where the hold change notice is not performed after the cover change indication effect is performed. May not be done. In this case, the small flying object image G1 appears to the left after appearing, but fades out from the upper left end of the display unit 7a without firing the right flash image G2. In this way, the pre-change indication that is not followed by the pending change notice or the challenge effect to V is called “pre-change indication effect”.

  It should be noted that after the reduced screen image G10 appears, a special figure variation effect and a hold effect other than the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are performed in the reduced screen image G10. That is, the special figure change effect and the hold effect excluding the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are performed by changing the place to the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a).

  Next, the regulation of the sign effect A will be described. In the following, unregulated precursor effect A will be referred to as “normal predictor effect A”, and regulated precursor effect A will be referred to as “regulatory predictor effect A”. When the sign effect A is performed when the sign effect is performed, the execution of the sign effect A is restricted (restricted), and the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed with priority. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), when the temporary stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the reachless loss is performed, and when attempting to display the stop, the game ball passes through the left gate 281 and is normally used. The sign effect A is about to be started with the start of the figure variation display. In this case, like the above-described normal sign effect A, the display unit 7a is switched from the daytime normal background image G100 to the first sign image for the sign effect G110, and the effect symbol EZ1 to the effect symbol EZ3 is deleted. Instead, as shown in FIG. 36B, the state in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a superimposed manner on the daytime normal background image G100 is maintained. In addition, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed with the start of the normal map display, but the reduced screen image G10 is displayed at the same position and the same size as the challenge effect start notification effect for V. And in the reduced screen image G10 displayed here, that is, in the special area of the display unit 7a, the challenge effect execution notification effect to V is configured and displayed in the normal region with the normal sign effect A. A second background image G111 for indication effect and a title image G9 (see FIGS. 26C, 26D, and 27A-1) are displayed.

  When the special figure 1 variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 36C, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are erased and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are started to be changed in the normal area of the display unit 7a. In addition, the second background image G111 for the sign effect and the title image G9 displayed in the special area when the special figure 1 stop display is performed are displayed in the normal area, and the first background image for the sign effect is displayed in the special area. G110 is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), a challenge effect execution notification image G11 for V is displayed so that the inner side of the title image G9 is painted in red, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1). In the first half of the challenge production for V. In this way, in the forbidden sign effect A, as in the normal sign effect A, it is not asked whether or not the first half of the challenge effect for V can be entered by reducing the reduced screen image G10. However, in the end, like the normal sign effect A, in the normal region of the display unit 7a, the bordered inner side of the title image G9 is painted in red from the second background image G111 for sign effect. V is displayed a challenge effect execution notification image G11 for V, and a first background image G110 for sign effect is displayed in a special area of the display unit 7a. In addition, while the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and the execution of the precursor effect A is restricted, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed in a range in which the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are visible. It is suggested that the warning effect A is performed by displaying the second background image G111 for the warning effect and the title image G9 in the reduced screen image G10.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in addition to the special figure fluctuation effect performed in the single figure fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display, the fluctuation of the symbols different in the normal figure fluctuation display and the special figure 2 fluctuation display. Since there are a series of effects (Challenge effects to V) performed across the display, variations in effects according to the progress of the game (control of the game) are increased, and the game entertainment is improved. Here, the first half of the challenge to V (especially the first challenge production) is performed in the conventional map variation display, and the first half of the challenge to the V (especially the first challenge) in the special map 2 variation display to be performed later. Since the second half of the challenge (particularly the last challenge production) to V, which is the continuation of the production, is related to the production content, the production is more interesting and the production effect is improved.

  In addition, for the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to open the second starting port 22 that generates the special drawing 2 lottery that is relatively easy to win the small V passing small hit. The game ball is fired at the first start opening 20 that generates the special figure 1 lottery that is relatively difficult to win the V passing small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is repeated and the big win winning or the small hit A game aimed at winning will be held. However, when the game ball passes the left gate 281 while the game ball is being fired aiming at the first starting port 20 by left-handed, a normal lottery is performed, and if a winning symbol A is won in the normal drawing lottery, a normal game In spite of the state, the long opening assist game is executed, and the second start port 22 is opened for a time when it is easy to enter the ball. When entering the second starting port 22, a special drawing 2 lottery is performed. The special figure 2 lottery can win a small win with a higher probability than the special figure 1 lottery. If you win a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery, a V pass small hit game will be played, so you can basically enter V during the V pass small hit game and enter the short time state after running the big hit game . Therefore, in the normal drawing state, the winning symbol A is won and the long opening assist game is executed, and during the long opening assist game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 22 and the special drawing 2 lottery is performed. Whether or not the player can enter the short-time state by winning the V passing small hit game and executing the V passing small hit game is one of the characteristic gaming characteristics (the best part). Therefore, the first half of the challenge presentation (first challenge presentation) to V with the long opening assist game is performed in the normal figure variation display related to the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B, and then in the special symbol 2 variation display, the V passing small hit The second half of the production of the challenge for V with the game (last challenge production). In other words, since the challenge production to V according to the game nature that develops in stages is performed, the gaming interest is improved.

  Further, the special figure 2 variable display that forms the latter half of the characteristic game performance is not executed unless the winning symbol A is derived in the universal figure variable display that forms the first half. That is, even if the first half of the challenge production to V is executed, depending on the display result of the variable map display (the result of the first challenge in the first challenge production), the special figure 2 variable display cannot be executed, The challenge for V ends in the first half of the challenge for V (cannot proceed to the second half of the challenge for V). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's feeling of excitement and improve the gaming interest. On the other hand, the special map variation display according to the special map variable display that is not directly related to the general map variable display (which is not developed from the general map variable display), and the general map variation A series of effects related to effects such as a challenge effect to V are not executed across the effects and the auxiliary game effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the production effect.

  In addition, when the second start port 22 is easy to open and the special figure 2 suspension digestion cycle is early and short, a series of effects is not executed across the normal figure fluctuation display and the special figure 2 fluctuation display. Thereby, it can prevent that a production becomes troublesome and a production effect falls.

  In the pachinko machine 1, the usual figure variation production (precursor production and the first half of the challenge to V) is performed larger (in a wide range) than the special figure variation production according to the special figure 1 fluctuation display. It is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of changing production. In this case, since the special figure variation effect performed on the display unit 7a is reduced, it is possible to further prevent the effect of the ordinary diagram variation effect from being lowered and improve the game entertainment. Furthermore, when the normal variation effect, more specifically, the precursor effect performed at the beginning of the normal variation effect is started, a reduced screen image G10 is displayed on the display unit 7a, and a relatively large normal area is displayed on the display unit 7a. A special special area is formed instead of the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display in the normal area. Instead, the special area corresponds to the special figure 1 fluctuation display. Special figure variation effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ordinary figure fluctuation effect and the special figure fluctuation effect from being mixed, and to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered.

  In addition, when a challenge effect to V (a special figure variation effect and a special figure 2 variable effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display) is started, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 included in the special drawing lottery effect are variably displayed. Is reduced and moved to a special area of the display unit 7a, but the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed in the same size as before the execution of the challenge effect to V even if the challenge effect to V is executed. And since it is performed at the same position, the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display can be easily understood.

  Further, when the precursor effect is started while the special figure 1 variable display is performed, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed in the range where the variable symbols of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed on the display unit 7a. Then, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that have been variably displayed are deleted. However, while the special figure 1 stop display indicating the special figure lottery result is being performed, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is given priority and the sign effect is restricted. Specifically, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the reduced screen image G10 is displayed in a range where the contents of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are stopped and displayed can be easily visually recognized (stop). The precursor effect is executed so that the contents of the displayed effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be easily recognized). In this way, by giving priority to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and restricting the sign effect, the player can be surely notified of the special drawing 1 lottery result, and a decrease in the game interest can be prevented.

  In addition, when the sign effect is started while the special figure 1 variable display is performed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that have been displayed in a variable manner are erased, thereby preventing the effect of the sign effect from being lowered. be able to. In addition, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed at the same size and at the same position as before the indication effect even if the indication effect is executed, so it is easy to understand the execution status of the special figure 1 variable display. can do.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the small flying object image G1 appears and the pre-change indication effect that moves in the left direction is performed, the first half of the challenge effect to V is executed without performing the hold change notice. Sometimes. In other words, it also serves as a precursor effect that inquires whether or not a pre-change indication effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a pending change notice will enter the first half of the challenge effect for V. Thus, when the small flying object image G1 appears and moves to the left, there is a possibility that the first half of the challenge effect to V (normal fluctuation effect) may be executed in addition to the pending change notice. As a result of the presence of a plurality of development destinations in this way, the fun of the presentation increases, so that the game entertainment is improved. Moreover, the pending change notice that is one of the development destinations suggests a jackpot expectation, and the first half of the challenge production to V, which is the other development destination, indicates the expectation for the execution of the long opening assist game, so the game is complicated Will be further improved. Further, the pending change notice is not the jackpot expectation for the currently-executed special figure 1 variable display, but the jackpot expectation for the special figure 1 variable display that has not yet been started and will be executed in the future. The complexity of the game will increase, and the entertainment will be further improved.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 22 while the special figure 1 variable display and the long opening assist game are being executed in the normal game state, a predetermined process is performed thereafter in the normal area of the display unit 7a. Since the connection effect during the auxiliary game that connects the effects (for example, the connection effect during the change in the special figure 1) is performed, the monotonization of the game can be reduced and the decrease in the game interest can be prevented. In addition, if a game ball does not enter the second starting port 22 during the auxiliary game, an electric chew non-winning effect is executed according to the fact that the ball could not be entered. It can be noticed that the second starting port 22 could not be entered.

  Further, when the predetermined effect performed in the normal area of the display unit 7a is started after the game ball enters the second start opening 22 during the long opening auxiliary game, the connection effect during the auxiliary game is ended, that is, the display unit In the normal area 7a, since the predetermined effect is switched from the connection effect during the auxiliary game, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect.

  In addition, during the long opening assist game, an electric chew launch promotion effect is performed in the normal area of the display unit 7a. When a game ball enters the second start port 22 at that time, special figure 1 variable display is being executed. If so, switch from the electric Chu launch promotion effect to the tie effect during the auxiliary game. Here, since the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold is “1”, if the game ball is set to the electric chew 23 during the auxiliary game, the special figure 2 hold cannot be increased even if the game ball is further entered. Therefore, if the game ball is changed to the electric chew 23 during the auxiliary game, the necessity to promote the entry into the electric chew 23 is reduced. That is, the timing at which the necessity of promoting the entry into the electric chew 23 is reduced coincides with the timing at which the electric chew launch promoting effect is switched to the auxiliary game connecting effect. In this way, the effect is switched according to the change in the game situation, so the effect of the effect is further improved.

  Also, during the long auxiliary game when the special figure 1 fluctuation display is being performed, when the game ball enters the second starting port 22 and the special figure 2 hold occurs, and the long opening auxiliary game ends. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display is continued, the special figure fluctuation effect (in accordance with the special figure 2 fluctuation display based on the special figure 2 suspension display from the auxiliary game intermediate connection effect at the end of the long opening auxiliary game ( Since it switches to the special figure 1 fluctuating connection effect connected to the second half of the challenge effect to V), it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Also, when the long opening assist game is being performed but the special figure 1 fluctuation display is not being performed, the game ball enters the second starting port 22 and the variable figure of the special figure 2 is immediately displayed. Since the special figure change effect (the second half of the challenge to V) is performed according to the special figure 2 change display without performing the change effect during the auxiliary game and the special figure 1 change during the change effect, It is possible to prevent the effects of the transition effect and the special figure variation effect (the second half of the challenge effect to V) from being lowered.

  Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure stop time for the small bonus symbol (small bonus symbol 2A to small bonus symbol 2C) related to the special symbol 2 lottery is longer in the normal gaming state than in the short time state. Here, the small winning symbol related to the special figure 2 lottery is the V passing small hit, and the special figure 2 lottery is easier to win the V passing small hit, but in the normal gaming state, the second start port 22 is opened. Because it is difficult, the V passing small hit game is rarely executed. Therefore, even if the V passing small hit game is executed in the normal gaming state, if the player misses the opportunity, the disadvantage suffered by the player is great. Therefore, the V-pass small hit game in the normal gaming state is made relatively long by relatively increasing the special figure stop time for the small bonus symbol (small hit symbol 2A to small hit symbol 2C) related to the special figure 2 lottery in the normal gaming state. This makes it difficult to miss the opportunity to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest. Also, in the short-time state, the second starting port 22 is easy to open, and the special drawing 2 lottery is easier to win a small hit. Therefore, basically, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting port 22 and the special ball is fired. The game which draws FIG. 2 is performed. Therefore, in the short time state, the small hit symbol (small hit symbol 2A to small hit symbol 2C) according to the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed at a higher frequency than in the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the short-time state, the special figure stop time for the small bonus symbol (small bonus symbol 2A to small bonus symbol 2C) related to the special symbol 2 lottery is relatively shortened, so that the progress of the game is smoothed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, in the small hit game, since the VAT 33 is opened, the player can make a small hit by performing the VAT launch promotion effect in the stop display of the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C performed before the V passing small hit game. It is possible to prevent the player from failing to enter the VAT 33 during the game, and to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player. Also, under the condition that the sorter 36 operates in a certain manner from the start of the small hit game, the short hit opening time of the V passing small hit game is set short in order to advance the game with good tempo during the short time state. ing. Therefore, if the V-pass small hit game is started in the normal gaming state, the VAT 33 is immediately released, so that the player cannot pass V on the occasion of the V-pass small hit game. Therefore, by extending the special figure determination time for the small bonus symbol related to the special symbol 2 lottery in the normal gaming state, it is possible to secure the time from the start of the small bonus symbol stop display until the VAT 33 starts. Further, by performing the VAT launch promotion effect during the long-time small hit symbol stop display, the player can surely enter the game ball into the VAT 33.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 81 [Main control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that a counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 81 described below are provided in the RAM 84. The initial value of the counter is “0”, the initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, and the initial value of the status is “1”. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed. In power-on processing, permission setting for access to the RAM 84, setting of the CPU 82, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are performed.

  Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S004). While the interrupt is permitted, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU 82, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. That is, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main timer interrupt process (S005) is finished and until the main timer interrupt process (S005) is started next, various kinds of normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) are performed. The update process of the random number counter value is repeatedly executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main timer interrupt process (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), an output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands set in the output buffer provided in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like.

  In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 81 also captures a detection signal from the lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower plate 62, and outputs the lower plate full data to the RAM 84. Store in buffer.

  The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B includes the execution period of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main timer interrupt process ( After the end of S005) and the period until the next main timer interrupt processing (S005) is started).

  Subsequent to the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the sensor detection process (S104), subsequently performs the normal operation process (S105), and further performs the special operation process (S106). Do. The sensor detection process, the normal operation process, and the special operation process will be described later.

  Subsequent to the special operation process (S106), a sorter control process for controlling the sorter 36 is performed (S107). The sorting device control process will be described later.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processing (S108) and ends the main timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S108), power-off monitoring processing when power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the RAM 84, and the like are performed. As other processing (S108), payout control processing for paying out a prize ball to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a winning ball counter for the first starting port 20, a winning ball counter for the second starting port 22, a winning ball counter for the first large winning port 30, and a winning ball counter for the second large winning port 32 are shown. Then, it is checked whether or not the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 27 exceeds “0”, and if it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 110. Then, when a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 81 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main process until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 (see FIG. 38), and when the interrupt pulse is input ( After about 4 msec), the main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output process (S101) of the main timer interrupt process (S005) that has been executed again, the game control microcomputer 81 receives the command set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 in the previous main timer interrupt process (S005). Output.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the general winning opening 27, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the general winning slot sensor 27a (S201). If a game ball has not been won in the general winning opening 27 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203. If a game ball has been won in the general winning opening 27 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the game. General winning award ball processing for paying out a prize ball is performed (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of winning balls (“3” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening 27 is added to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening 27.

  In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the left gate sensor 281a or the right gate sensor 282a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S206. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S203), it is determined whether or not a general chart operation status described later is 1, in other words, neither a general map variable display nor an auxiliary game is performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal figure operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S206. If the normal figure operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is set. A normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value and a winning symbol type random number indicated by the counter value of the winning symbol random number counter (label-TRND-AS) are acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number and the winning symbol type random number are provided in the RAM 84. It is stored in the ordinary map storage unit (S205), and the process proceeds to step S206.

  In step S206, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 22, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 22a. If no game ball has been won at the second start port 22 (NO at S206), the process proceeds to step S213. If a game ball has been won at the second start port 22 (YES at S206), the game ball is predetermined. Second start opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S207). In the second starting opening prize ball processing, the number of winning balls (“4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning at the second starting opening 22 is added to the winning start counter for the second starting opening 22.

  Next, whether the special figure 2 holding number (specifically, the value of the special figure 2 holding number (special figure 2 holding number counter) provided in the RAM 84) is equal to or greater than "1" (upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not (S208). If the special figure 2 hold number is “1” or more (YES in S208), the process proceeds to step S213, but if the special figure 2 hold number is not “1” or more (less than “1”) ( NO in S208), special figure 2 holding number addition processing is performed (S209). In the special figure 2 hold number addition process, the special figure 2 hold number counter is incremented by “1”, and the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 432 is increased by “1”.

  Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-AS), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-) RC) and a special figure fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-THP) are acquired and stored in a special figure related random number buffer provided in the RAM 84 (S210).

  Next, a second start winning command specifying process is performed (S211). In the second start winning command specifying process, the second starting winning command is checked by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 2 related random number acquired in step S210 with the start winning command specifying table for the second starting port shown in FIG. The command is specified, and the specified second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 stores the special figure 2 related random number acquired in step S210 in the special figure 2 storage unit 852 (S212).

  Subsequently, in step S213, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a. If the game ball has not won the first starting port 20 (NO in S213), the process proceeds to step S220, and if the game ball has won the first starting port 20 (YES in S213), the game ball is predetermined. First start opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S214). In the first starting opening prize ball processing, the number of winning balls (“4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning at the first starting opening 20 is added to the winning ball counter for the first starting opening 20.

  Next, the special figure 1 holding number (specifically, the value of the special figure 1 holding number (special figure 1 holding number counter) provided in the RAM 84) is equal to or greater than "4" (upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not (S215). If the special figure 1 hold number is “4” or more (YES in S215), the process proceeds to step S220, but if the special figure 1 hold number is not “4” or more (less than) (NO in S215). ), Special figure 1 holding number addition processing is performed (S216). In the special figure 1 hold number addition process, the special figure 1 hold number counter is incremented by "1", and the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 431 is increased by "1".

  Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-AS), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-) RC) and a special figure fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-THP) are acquired and stored in a special figure related random number buffer provided in the RAM 84 (S217).

  Next, a first start winning command specifying process is performed (S218). In the first start winning command specifying process, the first starting win command is checked by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related random number acquired in step S217 against the start winning command specifying table for the first starting port shown in FIG. The command is specified, and the specified first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 stores the special figure 1 related random number acquired in step S217 in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 hold number in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851 (S219).

  In step S220, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first grand prize opening 30, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first big prize port sensor 30a. If no game ball has won the first big prize opening 30 (NO in S220), the process proceeds to step S224. If a game ball has won the first big prize opening 30 (YES in S220), it is stored in the RAM 84. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided big winning opening winning counter is “9” or more (S221). The big prize winning prize counter is a counter for counting the number of winning prizes in the first big winning prize opening 30 and the second big winning prize opening 32 in one round game of the big hit game. The grand prize winning counter is cleared at the end of each round game. In the first embodiment, the prescribed number of winnings is set to “9”. Therefore, the process of step S221 is performed.

  If the counter value of the big prize winning prize counter is “9” or more (YES in S221), the process proceeds to step S224, and the counter value of the big prize winning prize counter is not “9” or more, that is, less than “9”. (NO in S221), the counter value of the big prize opening prize counter is incremented by “1” (S222), and the first big prize opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S223). ), Go to step S224. In the first grand prize opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls according to the prize winning to the first big prize opening 30 is stored in the prize ball counter for the first big prize opening 30 (“14” in the first embodiment). Is added.

  In step S224, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second big prize opening 32, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second big prize port sensor 32a. If a game ball has not won the second big prize opening 32 (NO in S224), the process proceeds to step S228. If a game ball has won the second big prize opening 32 (YES in S224), the big prize is won. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the winning prize counter is “9” or more (S225).

  If the counter value of the big prize winning prize counter is “9” or more (YES in S225), the process proceeds to step S228, and the counter value of the big winning prize winning counter is not “9” or more, that is, less than “9”. (NO in S225), the counter value of the winning prize winning counter is incremented by “1” (S226), and the second winning prize winning ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of winning balls to the player is performed (S227). ), Go to step S228. In the second grand prize winning ball processing, the number of prize balls according to the winning at the second big winning prize port 32 (“14” in the first embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the second big prize winning hole 32. Is added.

  In step S228, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 34 (entered into the specific area 34), that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 34a. If the game ball has not passed the specific area 34 (NO in S228), the sensor detection process is completed. If the game ball has passed the specific area 34 (YES in S228), whether the V validity period is in effect. It is determined whether or not (S229). The V effective period is a period set in step S2005 in the distribution device control process (see FIG. 56) described later. If it is not during the V effective period (NO in S229), the sensor detection process is completed, and if it is during the V effective period (YES in S229), the V passes according to the passage of the specific region 34 (V passing) during the V effective period. Processing is performed (S230), and the sensor detection process is terminated. In the V passing process, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on a V flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 34 (entered into the specific area 34) during the V effective period in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and the V passing command Is set to the output buffer, and the jackpot winning (2 types jackpot) is won by passing V during the small hit game, so the big win winning gaming state data indicating the current gaming state is stored in the RAM 84 as the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. Set to a predetermined area.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing relating to the control of the general map display 42 and the electric chew 23 will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, the processing related to the general-purpose display 42 and the electric Chu 23 is divided into four statuses (stages). “Normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each status. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 81 first confirms the “normal operation status” (S1101). When the “normal operation status” is “1”, the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed. When the “normal operation status” is “2”, the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the “normal operation status” is “3”, a normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4”, an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The “normal operation status” is set to “1” by default.

  The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby when the variable display and the auxiliary game are not performed. The normal symbol standby process will be described later.

  The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol variation process will be described later.

  The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the general symbol is stopped and displayed. The normal symbol determination process will be described later.

  The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when an auxiliary game is being performed. The auxiliary game control process (S1105) will be described later.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 44, in the normal symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not a common symbol related random number is stored (S1201). If the common figure related random number is not stored (NO in S1201), the normal symbol standby process is terminated. If the common figure related random number is stored (YES in S1201), the common figure determination process (S1202) is performed.

  In the common figure determination process (S1202), the game control microcomputer 81 reads the normal symbol random number in the stored common figure relational function, and determines whether or not it is correct based on the hit determination table (see FIG. 8A). Is determined (hit determination). If the result of the hit determination is “losing”, the loss normal map data representing the loss is set in the normal buffer of the RAM 84. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is “winning”, the winning symbol type random number in the stored common figure relation function is read, and based on the winning symbol type determination table (see FIG. 8B), The winning symbol type determination for determining the type of the winning symbol is performed. When this determination is made, the hit common figure data representing the type of the hit symbol is set in the normal figure buffer of the RAM 84.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is currently in the normal game state (non-time saving state) (S1203). If it is the normal gaming state (YES in S1203), the normal figure variation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state is selected (S1204), and the process proceeds to step S1206. The figure variation pattern determination table is selected (S1205), and the process proceeds to step S1206.

  In step S1206, the game control microcomputer 81 performs general-purpose variation pattern determination. Specifically, in the common figure variation pattern judgment table selected in step S1204 or step S1205, the stop common figure (losing common figure, winning symbol A, winning symbol B, winning symbol C) as a result of the usual symbol determination in step S1202. ) To determine the normal pattern variation pattern.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a general figure change start command indicating the normal figure change pattern determined in step S1206 in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1207), and responds to the normal figure change pattern determined in step S1206. The normal figure change time is set in the normal operation timer (S1208), and the normal figure change display of the normal figure change time is started on the general figure display 42 (S1209). The normal operation timer is updated in the other processing (S108) in FIG.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 deletes the common figure related random number (clears the common figure storage unit) (S1210), changes the normal operation status to “2” (S1211), and ends the normal symbol standby process. .

[Normal symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 45, in the normal symbol variation process (S1103), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not to end the regular symbol variation display, that is, after starting the regular symbol variation display, in step S1208. It is determined whether or not the normal time change time set in the normal operation timer has elapsed (S1251). If the normal symbol fluctuation display is not terminated (NO in S1251), the normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and the normal symbol variation display is terminated (YES in S1251), the general symbol display 42 is determined in step S1202. The normal stop display is performed (S1252), and the time required for the general stop display (the fixed figure determination time: 0.5 seconds in the first embodiment) is set in the normal operation timer (S1253). A usual figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display is stopped is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1254), the normal operation status is changed to "3" (S1255), and the normal symbol fluctuation process is terminated.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the normal symbol determination process (S1104), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not to stop the normal symbol stop display, that is, starts the normal symbol stop display (variation of the normal symbol). After the display is finished), it is determined whether or not the normal time set in the normal operation timer has elapsed in step S1253 (S1301). If the regular symbol confirmation time has not elapsed (NO in S1301), the normal symbol confirmation process is terminated, and if the universal symbol confirmation time has elapsed (YES in S1301), whether or not the winning symbol is currently stopped Is determined (S1302). If the winning symbol is not stopped and displayed (NO in S1302), the normal operation status is changed to “1” in order to execute the variable display of a new normal symbol (S1305), and the normal symbol determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped (YES in S1302), the auxiliary game preparation process for starting the auxiliary game is performed (S1303), and the normal operation status is changed to “4” to execute the auxiliary game. (S1304), and the normal symbol determination process ends. In the auxiliary game preparation process, an auxiliary game control table (TBL No. 4-1 to 4-3: see FIG. 8D) corresponding to the current game state and winning symbol type is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, The OP time is set in the timer for normal operation, and the number of times of opening of the electric chew 23 is set in the electric chue opening remaining number counter provided in the RAM 84. This is for grasping the number of times the electric chew 23 is opened in the auxiliary game.

[Auxiliary game control processing]
As shown in FIG. 47, in the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the hit ending flag indicating that the auxiliary game is ending is ON (S1351). . If the winning ending flag is ON (YES in step S1351), the process proceeds to step S1362, and if the winning ending flag is not ON (NO in step S1351), the electric Chu 23 (second starting port 22) is open. It is determined whether or not (S1352). If the electric chew 23 is open (YES in S1352), the process proceeds to step S1355, and if the electric chew 23 is not open (NO in S1352), the time for opening the electric chew 23 (second start port 22) ( In other words, it is determined whether or not the normal operation timer with the OP time set in step S1303 = 0 (S1353).

  If it is not the electric chew release time (NO in step S1353), the auxiliary game control process ends. On the other hand, if it is the electric chew release time (YES in step S1353), an electric chew release process is performed (S1354), and the auxiliary game control process ends. In the electric chew release processing, the auxiliary game control pattern table and the release frequency counter set in step S1303 are referred to set the release time corresponding to the release order in the normal operation timer and to release the electric chew 23. Then, the electric chew solenoid 23S is energized to drive the electric chew opening / closing member 23K to open the second starting port 22.

  In step S1355, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 23 is satisfied. In the first embodiment, the closing condition is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 23 (second starting port 22) in the opening reaches the specified maximum winning number (9 in the first embodiment per opening). Or a time for closing the electric chew 23 (that is, a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the electric chew 23 opened, in other words, a normal operation timer = 0) is satisfied. It is that you are. If the closing condition of the electric chew 23 is not satisfied (NO in S1355), the auxiliary game control process is finished. If the closing condition of the electric chew 23 is satisfied (YES in S1355), the electric chew closing process is performed. Perform (S1356). In the electric chew closing process, the electric chew solenoid 23S is energized to drive the electric chew opening / closing member 23K to close the electric chew 23.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the remaining electric chew release number counter by 1 (S1357), and determines whether or not the value of the remaining electric chew release number counter is “0” (S1358). If the value of the remaining electric chew release counter is not “0” (NO in S1358), the auxiliary game control process is finished (NO in S1358), and if the value of the remaining electric chew release counter is “0” (S1358). YES), the winning ending flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the RAM 84 (S1359), the auxiliary game control table set in step S1303 is referred to, and the ED time of the auxiliary game is set in the normal operation timer (S1360). The winning ending command indicating that the ending of the auxiliary game is started is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1361), and the auxiliary game control process is ended.

  In step S1362, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ending of the auxiliary game is ended, in other words, whether or not the ED time set in step S1360 has elapsed since the start of the ending of the auxiliary game. In other words, it is determined in step S1360 whether or not the normal operation timer in which the ED time is set = 0. If the auxiliary game ending does not end (NO in S1362), the auxiliary game control process ends, and if the auxiliary game ending ends (YES in S1362), the winning ending flag is turned OFF (S1363), and the normal operation status is displayed. The value is changed to “1” (S1364), and the auxiliary game control process is terminated.

[Special action processing]
Next, a special operation process related to the control of the special figure display 41, the special figure hold display 43, and the special winning devices 31, 33 will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, the processing related to the special figure indicator 41, the special figure hold indicator 43, and the special winning devices 31, 33 is divided into six statuses (stages). “Special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6” is assigned to each status. The game control microcomputer 81 first confirms the “special operation status” (S1501). The game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (S1502) when the “special operation status” is “1”, and changes the special symbol when the “special operation status” is “2”. Process (S1503) is performed, and when “Special action status” is “3”, special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is performed, and when “Special action status” is “4”, jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and when “special operation status” is “5”, game state setting processing (S1506) is performed, and when “special operation status” is “6”, a small hit game Control processing (S1507) is performed. The “special operation status” is set to “1” by default.

  The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby when the special symbol variable display, the big hit game, and the small hit game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be described in detail later.

  The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is variably displayed. The special symbol variation process will be described in detail later.

  The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be described in detail later.

  The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The jackpot game control process will be described in detail later.

  The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting a game state according to a jackpot symbol or the like when the jackpot game ends. The gaming state setting process will be described in detail later.

  The small hit game control process (S1507) is a process performed in the big hit game. The small hit game control process will be described in detail later.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is “0” (S1601). If the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no special figure 2 related random number obtained due to winning at the second start port 22, the special figure 1 is stored. It is determined whether the number of holds is “0” (S1608). If the special figure 1 hold number is also “0” (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no special figure 1 related random number acquired due to winning at the first starting port 20, the customer It is determined whether the wait flag is ON (S1618). If the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol standby processing is finished. If the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). Then, the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is finished.

  In step S1601, if the number of reserved special figure 2 is not “0” (NO in S1601), that is, if there is one or more random numbers related to special figure 2 acquired due to winning at the second starting port 22 Performs special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing (S1603).

  In the special figure 2 determination process (S1602), the special symbol random number stored first in the special figure 2 storage unit 852 is read out, and the second jackpot determination table (FIG. 9A) is read out. Based on (reference), it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (a big hit determination). If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out, and the jackpot symbol type determination (jacket symbol type determination) is performed based on the second jackpot symbol type determination table (see FIG. 9B). Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the RAM 84, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the RAM 84. In addition, as the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state data at the time of winning the jackpot indicating the current gaming state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84. If the result of the jackpot determination is a small hit, the small hit symbol type random number is read out, and the determination of the small hit symbol type (small hit) is made based on the second small hit symbol type determination table (see FIG. 9C). Perform symbol type determination). Then, the small hit symbol data representing the small hit symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the RAM 84, and the symbol designation command indicating the small hit symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the RAM 84. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the symbol design data indicating the loss is set in the special buffer, and the symbol designating command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer.

  Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) (S1651). If it is the normal gaming state (YES in S1651), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the normal gaming state is selected (S1652), and then the process proceeds to step S1654. If it is not the normal gaming state (NO in S1651), the time is shortened. After selecting the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

  In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is “jackpot”. If it is a big hit (YES in S1654), after selecting the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpot from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1661), the step The process proceeds to S1662, and if it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), it is judged whether or not the big hit determination result is “small hit” (S1655). If it is a small hit (YES in S1655), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the small hit is selected from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1660). From step S1662, if not a small hit (NO in S1655), reach determination is performed (S1656). In the reach determination, the reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is collated with a reach determination table (see FIG. 9D) corresponding to the current game state (non-short-time state / short-time state), with or without reach. Determine whether.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the reach determination result in step S1656 is “with reach” (S1657). If there is a reach (YES in S1657), select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1659). After that, the process proceeds to step S1662, and if there is no reach (NO in S1657), the current special figure 2 holding number is confirmed, and in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. From FIG. 2, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for losing without reach corresponding to the number of reserved special figure 2 is selected (S1658), and the process proceeds to step S1662. However, in the first embodiment, only one type of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for losing without reach is provided regardless of the number of special figure 2 holds, so in this process, it is related to the current gaming state. One special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for one reachless loss is selected.

  In step S1662, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the special figure fluctuation pattern random number, and compares the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1658 to S1661. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment for judging the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern is performed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a special figure 2 fluctuation start command indicating the decided special figure 2 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer (S1663), and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to the decided special figure 2 fluctuation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1664), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process. The special operation timer is updated for 4 ms in the other processing (S108) of FIG. The special figure 2 change start command to be set includes information on the special symbol type (that is, special figure 2), information on the result of the jackpot determination performed in the special figure 2 determination process (S1602), and special information. 2 includes information on the result of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination performed in the fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) (information including the presence / absence of reach and information on the special figure fluctuation time).

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 causes the special figure 2 display 412 to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604). .

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 852 by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 852. The special storage area shift processing for clearing the storage area (storage area farthest from the read side) corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 2 is performed (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 suspension is digested in the order of suspension.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the special figure 2 hold number counter by “1” (S1606), and changes the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 432 by “1” (change) ( S1607), the special operation status is changed to “2” (S1615).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1617), and the special symbol standby processing is performed. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is terminated without executing step S1617.

  Also, if the special figure 2 hold number is “0” but the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no hold information of special figure 2, but the first start When there is more than one special figure 1 related random number storage (holding information of special figure 1) acquired due to winning in the mouth 20, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination Processing (S1610) is performed. The special figure 1 determination process (S1609) is the same process as the special figure 2 determination process (S1602), and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610) is basically the same process as the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603), and the description thereof will be omitted. However, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, when the special figure 1 lottery result is a reachless loss, the current special figure 1 holding number is confirmed, and the special figure selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 is selected. From the fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 1, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for reachless loss corresponding to the number of reserved special figure 1 is selected.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 causes the special figure 1 display 411 to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851 to the side read from the current position, and also displays the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851. A special figure 1 hold storage unit shift process is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth hold in (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 suspension is digested in the order of suspension.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the special figure 1 hold number counter by “1” (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 431 by “1” (S1614). ), The special operation status is changed to “2” (S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1616.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation display based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is “0” (YES in S1601). That is, the special figure 2 suspension digestion is executed in preference to the special figure 1 suspension digestion. In the first embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is more likely to win the jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold (see FIG. (See FIG. 9C).

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process (S1503), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not to end the special symbol variation display, that is, the special diagram variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (special operation counter = 0) (S1701). When the special symbol fluctuation display is not terminated (NO in S1701), when the special symbol variation processing is terminated and the special symbol variation display is terminated (YES in S1701), the special symbol display on the special symbol display 41 is displayed. The special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data, small bonus symbol data or lost symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

  Subsequently, special figure determination time determination for determining the special figure determination time is performed (S1703), the determined special figure determination time is set in the special operation timer (S1704), and the special symbol variation display is terminated. The special figure fluctuation stop command shown is set in the output buffer (S1705), the special operation status is changed to “3” (S1706), and the special symbol fluctuation process is terminated. As described above, the special figure determination time determination table is associated with the gaming state (normal gaming state / short time state) and the special figure type (special figure 1 / special figure 2). The figure fixed time is stored in association with the jackpot determination result.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not to stop the special symbol stop display, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1704 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). If the special symbol stop display is not terminated (NO in S1751), the special symbol confirmation process is terminated and the special symbol stop display is terminated (YES in S1751), and the current state is the time reduction state (the time reduction flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1752).

  If the current time is not short (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1756. If the current time is short (YES in S1752), the remaining number of times that the special symbol variable display that can be executed in the short time state (remaining time) The value of the time remaining number counter is decremented by “1” (S1753), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time remaining number counter is “0” (S1754). If the value of the time-remaining remaining number counter (time-remaining remaining number) is not “0” (NO in S1754), the process proceeds to step S1756. YES), the time-short state is shifted to the non-time-short state (the time-short flag is turned OFF) (S1755). That is, the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) is set.

  Next, a game state command indicating the current game state is set in the output buffer (S1756), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol (S1757). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1757), it is determined whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol (S1761). If it is not a small winning symbol (NO in S1761), the special action status is changed to “1” (S1764), and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is a jackpot symbol in step S1757 (YES in S1757), the gaming state is reset (the normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the hourly flag is turned OFF and the hourly remaining number counter value is set to “0”. (S1758). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 performs jackpot game preparation processing (S1759), changes the special operation status to “4” (S1760), and ends the special symbol determination processing. In the jackpot game preparation process, a special game control table (TBL No. 11-1 to 11-3) corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and a jackpot opening flag indicating that the jackpot game is being opened Is turned on in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and according to the type of the jackpot symbol, a predetermined opening time (time from the start of the jackpot game to the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer, A jackpot opening command corresponding to the type is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84. The jackpot opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol represents that a jackpot game (opening of jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped is started.

  If it is a small hit symbol in step S1761 (YES in S1761), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a small hit game preparation process (S1762) and changes the special operation status to “6” (S1763). The symbol determination process ends. In the small hit game preparation process, a special game control table (TBL No. 11-2 to 11-3) corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84 to indicate that the small hit game is being opened. The small winning opening flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and the predetermined opening time (from the start of the small winning game until the opening of the first second big winning opening 32 starts according to the type of the small winning symbol. Time) is set in the special operation timer, the number of times the second big prize opening 32 is opened is set in the AT opening number counter provided in the RAM 84, and a small hit opening command corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol is set in the RAM 84. Set in the output buffer, turn on the distribution device control flag indicating that the distribution device 36 is to be controlled in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, Ri (in the first embodiment, 0.008 sec) time since the game is started until the specific area 34 is opened (V open) and is set to V off control timer provided in the RAM 84. The small hitting opening command corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol represents that a small hitting game (opening of the small hitting game) according to the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed is started.

[Big hit game control processing]
As shown in FIG. 53, in the jackpot game control process (S1505), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the opening flag is ON (S1801). If the jackpot opening flag is not ON (NO in S1801), the process proceeds to step S1808, and if the jackpot opening flag is ON (YES in S1801), whether or not to end the opening of the jackpot game (jackpot opening), in other words In step S1759, the special operation timer in which the opening time is set = 0, and it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed since the opening was started (S1802). If the opening is not finished (NO in S1802), the jackpot game control process is terminated and the opening is finished (YES in S1802), the jackpot opening flag is turned OFF (S1803), and the counter value of the round number counter is being executed. It is determined whether it is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “the number of execution rounds”) (S1804). As will be described later, the round number counter is incremented by “1” at the start of each round game. If the counter value of the round number counter is the number of execution rounds, in other words, if all the round games in the running jackpot game are executed (YES in S1804), the process proceeds to step S1813, and the counter value of the round number counter is If it is not the number of execution rounds (NO in S1804), the process proceeds to step S1805.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 increments the round number counter by “1” (S1805), and based on the special game control table set in step S1759 and the number of rounds of the round game to be started, A big winning opening opening process for releasing 30 is performed (S1806), a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds of a round game to be started is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1807), and the big hit game control process is terminated. . The gaming control microcomputer 81 energizes the first big prize opening solenoid 31S to drive the normal AT opening / closing member 31K to open the first big prize opening 30 in the big prize opening process, and opens the first big prize opening 30 in a predetermined area of the RAM 84. A special prize opening flag indicating that the first big prize opening 30 is being opened is turned ON, and the opening time of the first big prize opening 30 in a round game to be started with reference to the special game control table is set as a timer for special operation. Set to.

  In step S1808, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot ending flag indicating that the jackpot game, which will be described later, is in an ending state, is ON. If the jackpot ending flag is ON (YES in S1808), the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the process to step S1816. If the jackpot ending flag is not ON (NO in S1808), the current winning prize opening (first big prize) It is determined whether or not the mouth 30) is open (S1809). Whether or not the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is being opened is determined based on whether or not the big prize opening flag is ON. The game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S1812 if the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is not open (NO in S1809), and if the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is open. If YES in S1809 (YES in S1809), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening termination condition is satisfied (S1810). The condition for ending the grand prize opening is that a predetermined number of winning prizes for the grand prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 32) in the round game has been reached, or the big prize opening ( A predetermined opening time has elapsed since the opening of the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 32) (in step S1806, the special operation timer in which the opening time of the first big prize opening 30 is set is “ 0 ”) is satisfied.

  The gaming control microcomputer 81 terminates the jackpot game control process if the big winning opening release end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1810), and if the big winning opening release end condition is satisfied (YES in S1810). The winning opening is closed (S1811). In the big prize opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 energizes the first big prize opening solenoid 31S to drive the normal AT opening / closing member 31K to close the first big prize opening 30 and set the big prize opening release flag. It is turned OFF, and the closing time of the first big prize opening 30 in the currently executed round game is set in the special operation timer with reference to the special game control table.

  In step S1812, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the interval end condition has ended. The interval ending condition is that a predetermined closing time has elapsed since the grand prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 32) was closed in the round game (the first big prize opening 30 in step S1811). The special operation timer for which the closing time is set to “0”). The game control microcomputer 81 ends the jackpot game control process if the interval end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1812), and proceeds to step S1804 if the interval end condition is satisfied (YES in S1812).

  If the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S1804 that the counter value of the round number counter is the number of execution rounds (YES in S1804), a jackpot ending flag indicating that the jackpot game is ending is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 84. Turns on (S1813), sets the predetermined ending time (time from the end of all round games to the end of jackpot game) in the special action timer according to the type of jackpot symbol (S1814), jackpot A jackpot ending command corresponding to the symbol type is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1815), and the jackpot game control process is terminated. The jackpot ending command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that the ending of the jackpot game corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped is started.

  In step S1816, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not to end the big hit game ending (big hit ending), in other words, the special operation timer set to the ending time in step S1814 = 0, and the ending starts. It is determined whether the ending time has elapsed since then. If the jackpot ending is not terminated (NO in S1816), the jackpot game control process is terminated and the jackpot ending is terminated (YES in S1816), the jackpot ending flag is turned OFF (S1817), and the special operation status is set to “5”. It changes (S1818) and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S1506), the game control microcomputer 81 first sets a time reduction state, that is, turns on a time reduction flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 84 (S1851), and outputs a game state command indicating the set time reduction state as an output buffer. Set to (S1852).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 confirms the jackpot symbol or the jackpot symbol due to the jackpot game related to the game state setting process (S1853), confirms the game state at the time of the jackpot winning (S1854), The time-stipulated number of times is determined by collating with the time-stipulated number-of-times judgment table (S1855), the time-stipulated number of times is set in the time-save remaining number counter (S1856), and the special operation status is changed to 1 ( S1857), the game state setting process is terminated. Note that the game status at the time of winning the big win is referred to the game status data at the time of winning the big win set in step S230, or step S1602 or step S1609.

[Small hit game control processing]
As shown in FIG. 55, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small hit opening flag is ON in the small hit game control process (S1507) (S1901). If the small hitting opening flag is not ON (NO in S1901), the process proceeds to step S1907. If the small hitting opening flag is ON (YES in S1901), whether or not the opening of the small hitting game (small hitting opening) is ended. In other words, it is determined whether or not the special operation timer in which the opening time is set in step S1762 = 0 and the opening time has elapsed since the opening was started (S1902). When the small hit opening is not finished (NO in S1902), when the small hit game control process is finished and the small hit opening is finished (YES in S1902), the small hit opening flag is turned off (S1903), the AT opening number counter It is determined whether or not the counter value is the number of times the second big winning opening 32 is released in the small hit game being executed (hereinafter referred to as “the number of executed ATs released”) (S1904). As will be described later, the AT opening number counter is incremented by “1” at the start of each opening. If the counter value of the AT opening number counter is the number of executed AT opening, in other words, when the opening of all the second big winning holes 32 in the small hit game being executed (YES in S1904), the process proceeds to step S1912, If the count value of the AT release number counter is not the number of execution AT releases (NO in S1904), the process proceeds to step S1905.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 increments the AT opening number counter by “1” (S1905), and based on the special game control table set in step S1762 and the opening order of the second big prize opening 32 starting from now on. Then, a big prize opening process for opening the second big prize opening 32 is performed (S1906), and the small hit game control process is ended. The game control microcomputer 81 energizes the second big prize opening solenoid 33S to drive the VAT opening / closing member 33K to open the second big prize opening 32 in the big prize opening opening process, and opens the second big prize opening 32 in a predetermined area of the RAM 84. The big prize opening release flag indicating that the big prize opening 32 is being opened is turned on, and the opening time for opening the second big prize opening 32 starting from now is set in the special operation timer with reference to the special game control table. To do.

  In step S1907, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a small hitting ending flag indicating that the small hitting game ending described later is being ended is ON. If the small hitting ending flag is ON (YES in S1907), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S1920. If the small hitting ending flag is not ON (NO in S1907), the game control microcomputer 81 It is determined whether or not the big prize opening 32) is open (S1908). Whether or not the big prize opening (second big prize opening 32) is being opened is determined by whether or not the big prize opening flag is ON. The game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S1911 if the big prize opening (second big prize opening 32) is not open (NO in S1908), and if the big prize opening (second big prize opening 32) is open. If (YES in S1908), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening termination condition is satisfied (S1909). The condition for ending the big prize opening is that the predetermined number of winning prizes (“9” in the first embodiment) to the big prize opening (second big prize opening 32) in the small hit game is reached, or the big prize opening A predetermined opening time has elapsed since the opening of the (second big prize opening 32) (in step S1906, the special operation timer in which the opening time of the second big prize opening 32 is set becomes "0") ) Is satisfied.

  The gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the small hit game control process if the big winning opening release end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1909), and if the big winning opening release end condition is satisfied (YES in S1909). Close the big prize opening (S1910). The game control microcomputer 81 energizes the second big prize opening solenoid 33S to drive the VAT opening / closing member 33K to close the second big prize opening 32 and turn off the big prize opening release flag in the big prize opening closing process. Then, with reference to the special game control table, the closing time of the second big prize opening 32 is set in the special operation timer.

  In step S1910, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the interval end condition has ended. The interval end condition is that a predetermined closing time has elapsed since the closing of the winning a prize opening (second winning prize opening 32) (timer for special operation in which the closing time of the second winning a prize opening 32 is set in step S1910). Has become “0”). If the interval end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1911), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the small hit game control process. If the interval end condition is satisfied (YES in S1911), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S1904.

  When the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S1904 that the counter value of the AT release count counter is the number of executed AT releases (YES in S1904), whether or not the V flag is ON, that is, during the small hit game It is determined whether or not V has passed (S1912).

  If the V flag is ON (YES in S1912), the big hit game is played after the small hit game, so the V flag is turned OFF (S1913), the gaming state is reset (the normal gaming state is set. Specifically, , Turn off the hour / hour flag and set the value of the hour / hour remaining counter to “0” (S1914), perform jackpot game preparation processing (S1915), change the special action status to “4” (S1916) The game control process ends. In the jackpot game preparation process, a special game control table (TBL No. 10-2 to 10-3) corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84 to indicate that the jackpot game is being opened. The flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and according to the type of the small hit symbol, a predetermined opening time (the time from the start of the big hit game until the start of the second round) is set in the special operation timer. A jackpot opening command corresponding to the symbol type is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84. The jackpot opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol represents that a jackpot game (opening of jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed is started.

  If the V flag is not ON (NO in S1912), since the big hit game is not performed, the small hit ending flag indicating that the small hit game is ending is turned on in a predetermined area of the RAM 84 (S1917). Depending on the type of game, a predetermined ending time (the time from the end of opening of all the second big prize opening 32 to the end of the small hit game) is set in the special operation timer (S1918) A small hitting ending command corresponding to the symbol type is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1919). The small hitting ending command corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol represents that the ending of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit symbol displayed in a stopped state is started.

  In step S1920, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not to end the small hitting game ending (small hitting ending), in other words, the special operation timer in which the ending time is set in step S1918 = 0. It is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed since the ending started. If you do not end the small hitting ending (NO in S1920), if you end the small hitting game control process and end the small hitting ending (YES in S1920), turn off the small hitting ending flag (S1921), the special operation status It is changed to “1” (S1922), and the small hit game control process is terminated.

[Distributor control processing]
As shown in FIG. 56, in the distribution device control process (S107), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the distribution device control flag is ON (S2001). As described above, the distribution device control flag is turned ON by the small hit game preparation process in step S1762. If the distribution device control flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the distribution device control process. If the distribution device control flag is ON (YES in S2001), the distribution member 36K is turned on. It is determined whether or not the V open flag indicating that the passage is permitted and the V is open is ON (S2002). If the V releasing flag is ON (YES in S2002), the process proceeds to step S2007. If the V releasing flag is not ON (NO in S2002), the specific area 34 is opened after the small hit game is started (V In detail, whether or not the time (V release start time) set in the V opening / closing control timer in the small hit game preparation process in step S1762 has become 0. It is determined whether or not (S2003). If it is not the V opening start time (NO in S2003), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes the sorting device control process, and if it is the V opening start time (YES in S2003), performs the sorting member operation process (S2004), A V valid period setting process is performed (S2005), the V open flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the RAM 84 (S2006), and the sorting apparatus control process is completed.

  In the sorting member operating process, the sorting solenoid 36S is energized to drive the sorting member 36K to open the specific area 34 and to open the specific area 34 (in the first embodiment, 4 times). .6 seconds) is set in the V open / close control timer. The time for opening the specific area 34 set in the V opening / closing control timer is the V opening end time described later.

  In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period is set for the constant operation of the sorting member 36K as described above. The V effective period is a period in which the detection of the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 34a, and the V flag is turned ON in the V effective period. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 84.

  In step S2007, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening end time is reached. Specifically, whether or not the V opening / closing control timer for which the V opening end time is set in step S2004 has become 0. Determine. If it is not the V release end time (NO in S2007), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the distribution device control process. If it is the V release end time (YES in S2007), the V release flag is turned off (S2008). A V effective period releasing process for releasing (ending) the set V effective period is performed (S2009), the distribution device control flag is turned off (S2010), and the distribution device control process is ended. The game control microcomputer 81 turns off the V flag in the V valid period releasing process.

  In the first embodiment, the V effective period is canceled with the end of the open state of the specific region 34. However, a time longer than the V release end time from the time when the open state of the specific region 34 starts. You may cancel when it has passed. This is to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player in consideration of the time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the sorting member 36K reaches the specific area 34.

6). Production control by production control microcomputer 91 [Sub-control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. Note that a counter, a timer, a flag, a buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the production control by the production control microcomputer 91 below are provided in the RAM 94. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control board 90 reads out the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG.

  As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a power-on process corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the CPU 92, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are performed.

  Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. In addition, the random number for determination of a pending change, a random number for determination of a predecessor effect gasse execution, a random number for determination of a hold change notice type, a random number for determination of a pre-change indication effect, a random number for determination of execution of a prelude effect, and a random number for determination of a prelude effect type There are various random numbers for determining the production contents such as the first challenge production pattern determination random number, the stop symbol determination random number, and the special figure variation production pattern determination random number. As an example, the determination random number counter updating method for various effects can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Random values may not be added one by one at the time of update, but may be added two by two. The same applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above.

  When the random number seed update process ends, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 (for example, a pending change notice notice command at the time of winning, a pending change notice notice command at the time of shift, a pending change notice notice during change) Command, special figure variation production start command, precursor production gaze start command, maintenance change indication production start command, precursor production regulation start command, precursor production regulation end command, reduced screen display termination command, second challenge production second half start command , Ordinary figure variation production start command, auxiliary game mid-connection production start command, special figure 1 variation mid-connection production start command, electric-chu non-winning production start command, customer waiting start command, opening production start command, round production start command, and Ending production start command, etc.) To send to 100. The image control board 100 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 7a in accordance with the received command (executes various effects based on the image). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 100, the sub-control board 90 outputs sound from the speaker 67 via the sound control circuit 106 (executes various effects by sound), or a lamp control circuit. The frame lamp 66 is caused to emit light via 107 (performs various effects by light emission), or the movable panel 15K is actuated (performs various effects by operation). The various effects include special figure fluctuation effects, jackpot game effects (opening effects, round effects, ending effects), ordinary figure change effects, auxiliary game effects, operation promotion effects, customer waiting effects, and the like.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

  The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time an STB signal (strobe signal), that is, various commands sent from the main control board 80 are input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 91 stores various commands received and received in the output process (S101) of the main control board 80 in the reception buffer of the RAM 94. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

  The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1 msec cycle is input to the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs an input process of creating effect button switch data based on a detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a in the 1 ms timer interruption process (S4011). In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is created in the other process (S4206) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process to be described later in order to make the frame lamp 66 emit light at the timing suitable for the effect by the image in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011). A lamp control process for outputting the lamp data to the lamp control circuit 107 is performed. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the frame lamp 66 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the lamp data. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 performs drive control processing for generating or outputting drive data in order to drive the movable panel 15K at a predetermined timing in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). The drive data set in each process in the later-described 10 ms timer interrupt process is also output in this process. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the movable panel 15K in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 has a timer for measuring the time related to each production such as special drawing variation production, ordinary diagram variation production, jackpot game production, auxiliary game production, operation promotion production, and customer waiting production. An effect timer update process to be updated is performed (S4202). Furthermore, a customer waiting effect execution process (S4203) for starting the customer waiting effect is performed.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch state acquisition process in which the effect button switch data created in the 1 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM 94 as effect button switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4204). The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 63 by the switch state acquisition process.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a warning effect restriction release determination process for returning the restriction warning effect A to the normal warning effect A (S4205). The precursor effect restriction release determination process will be described later.

  Thereafter, as described later, the effect control microcomputer 91 is set in the output buffer and transmitted to the image control board 100 as shown in FIG. Gase start command, ordinary diagram change production start command, auxiliary game mid-connection production start command, special figure 1 variation mid-connection production start command, customer waiting start command, opening production start command, round production start command, and ending production start command To the voice control circuit 106 and the creation of lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the frame lamp 66) and voice data (data for controlling the output of voice from the speaker 67). Is output (S4206).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the reception command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 first receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the main control board 80, in other words, receives the start winning command. It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If a start winning command has been received (YES in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4302, while if a starting winning command has not been received (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

  In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a start winning process according to the winning of a game ball in the first start port 20 or the second start port 22. The start winning process will be described later.

  In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a symbol designation command is received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether the symbol designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the design control microcomputer 91 does not receive the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305. If the symbol designation command is received (YES in S4303), the symbol designation command is stored in the RAM 94. This is stored in the symbol designation command storage unit 96 (S4304). Here, the information (special drawing analysis result) acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 can be used as appropriate in processes executed thereafter.

  In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a special figure change start command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether the special figure change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the contents of the special figure change effect are determined. In order to update the special figure fluctuation production start process (S4306) for starting the special figure fluctuation production, the hold icon shift process (S4307) for shifting the hold icon, and the short time remaining number display indicating the short time remaining number display. The effect mode remaining times display control process (S4308) is performed. The special figure variation effect start process and the hold icon shift process will be described later.

  In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special effect fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4309), the performance control microcomputer 91 proceeds to step S4314. If the special effect fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4309), the special figure change Special drawing variation production end processing (S4310) for ending the production (stopping the variation display of the production symbols and small symbols and performing the stop display), variation icon erasure processing (S4311) for erasing the variation icon, precursor Predictive effect regulation processing (S4312) for determining whether or not to render an effect is performed, and reduced screen display end determination processing (S4313) for determining whether or not to end the display of the reduced screen.

  In the special figure fluctuation effect end processing, the special figure fluctuation stop command is analyzed, and based on the result of the analysis, the special figure fluctuation effect is appropriately terminated (the fluctuation display of the production symbol and the small symbol is stopped). An effect end command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. When the image control board 100 receives the special figure variation effect end command, the image control board 100 ends the currently executed special figure variation effect (stops the changing effect symbol or the small symbol). Furthermore, in the special figure variation effect end process, it is determined whether or not the special drawing variation effect being executed is a success in the latter half of the challenge effect for V. A command for executing the small hit game entry effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. As shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure 2 lottery in the normal gaming state is a small hit, that is, when the second half of the challenge production to V is successful, the special figure confirmation time of the special figure 2 stop display to be performed after that Is set to 13 seconds, which is longer than in other cases. Therefore, when receiving the command, the image control board 100 first executes the VAT launch promotion effect and then executes the small hit game rush effect during the special figure 2 stop display.

  In the variation icon erasing process, a variation icon display end command indicating that the variation icon is to be erased is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. When receiving the change icon display end command, the image control board 100 deletes the displayed change icon. The indication effect regulation process (S4312) and the reduced screen display end determination process (S4313) will be described later.

  In step S4314, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the jackpot opening command is received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the jackpot opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the jackpot opening command is not received (NO in S4314), the performance control microcomputer 91 proceeds to step S4316. If the jackpot opening command is received (YES in S4314), the jackpot game opening starts. Accompanied jackpot opening production start processing is performed (S4315). In the jackpot opening effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the jackpot opening command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening effect according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed based on the analysis result. If it is determined and executed, the effect content of the jackpot opening effect (hit opening effect pattern) is selected, and a jackpot opening effect start command for starting the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern is output to the RAM 94 Set to.

  In step S4316, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a round number designation command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command has not been received (NO in S4316), the process proceeds to step S4318. On the other hand, if the round number designation command has been received (YES in S4316), a round effect start process is performed at the start of the round game. (S4317). In the round production start process, the production control microcomputer 91 analyzes the round number designation command to determine whether or not to execute the round production according to the round game to be started. The effect content (round effect pattern) is selected, and a round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  In step S4318, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a jackpot ending command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether the jackpot ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the jackpot ending command has not been received (NO in S4318), the process proceeds to step S4321, whereas if the jackpot ending command has been received (YES in S4318), the jackpot ending effect start processing ( S4319) and production mode setting processing (S4320) are performed.

  In the jackpot ending effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the jackpot ending command, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and executes it. For example, the effect content of the jackpot ending effect (the jackpot ending effect pattern) is selected, and a jackpot ending effect start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  In addition, in the effect mode setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process for setting the effect mode after the jackpot game (a process for controlling the effect mode) based on the analysis result of the jackpot ending command. .

  In step S4321, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the small hit opening command is received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the small hit opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the play control microcomputer 91 has not received a small hit opening command (NO in S4321), the process proceeds to step S4323. If the small hit opening command has been received (YES in S4321), the small hit game opening A small hitting opening effect start process is performed with the start of (S4322). The effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the small hit opening command in the small hit opening effect start processing for the small hit game executed by the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal game state, and executes from now on based on the analysis result It is determined whether or not to perform a small hit opening effect according to the opening of the small hit game to be performed, and if so, the content of the small hit opening effect (small hit opening effect pattern) is selected and the selected small A small hit opening effect start command for starting the small hit opening effect with the hit opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  In step S4323, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the V passing command is received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the V passing command is stored in the reception buffer. If the V pass command has not been received (NO in S4323), the process proceeds to step S4325. If the V pass command has been received (YES in S4323), a V pass effect start process associated with the V pass is performed (S4324). . In the V passing effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the V passing is the first V passing in the small hit game being executed. A V-pass effect start command for notification is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. If it is not the first V pass, the V pass effect start process is terminated without setting the V pass effect start command in the output buffer of the RAM 94. That is, the V pass effect is performed only in response to the first V pass in the small hit game.

  In step S4325, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the small hitting ending command is received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the small hitting ending command is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received a small hitting ending command (NO in S4325), the process proceeds to step S4327, while if it has received a small hitting ending command (YES in S4325), the small hitting game ending A small hitting ending production start process is performed in accordance with the start of (S4326). In the small hitting ending effect start processing for the small hitting game executed by the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal gaming state, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the small hitting ending command and executes it based on the analysis result. It is determined whether or not to execute a small hitting ending effect according to the ending of the played small hit game, and if so, the content of the small hitting ending effect (small hitting ending effect pattern) is selected and the selected small A small hitting ending effect start command for starting the small hitting ending effect in the hitting ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  In step S4327, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the gaming state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the gaming control command is not received (NO in S4327), the performance control microcomputer 91 proceeds to step S4329, whereas if the gaming control command is received (YES in S4327), the gaming control command is analyzed. Then, the gaming state represented by the gaming state command is specified, and a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state is performed (S4328). In the gaming state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the RAM 94. For example, if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the gaming state flag “00H” in the gaming state flag area of the RAM 94. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the gaming state flag “01H” in the gaming state flag area of the RAM 94 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the short-time state.

  In step S4329, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal change start command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the normal change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the usual figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4329), the process proceeds to step S4331, while if the usual figure change start command has been received (YES in S4329), the contents of the ordinary figure change effect are determined. Then, a general map change effect determination process (S4330) for starting the normal map change effect is performed. The general fluctuation variation determination process will be described later.

  In step S4331, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a winning opening command is received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether the winning opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the winning control command 91 has not received a winning opening command (NO in S4331), the process proceeds to step S4333, while if the winning control command has been received (YES in S4331), the assisting control is started. A game start process is performed (S4332). The auxiliary game start process will be described later.

  In step S4333, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a winning ending command is received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether the winning ending command is stored in the reception buffer. If the winning control ending command has not been received (NO in S4333), the performance control microcomputer 91 proceeds to step S4335. If the winning ending command has been received (YES in S4333), the assist control accompanying the end of the auxiliary game is performed. Processing at the end of the game is performed (S4334). The auxiliary game end process will be described later.

  In step S4335, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a customer waiting command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the customer control command 91 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4335), the effect control microcomputer 91 finishes the received command analysis process. Is performed (S4336). In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines a waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from when the stop display of the effect symbol or the small symbol is performed until the customer waiting effect is started. Set in the waiting time production timer. Whether or not this waiting time has elapsed is monitored by the customer waiting effect execution process in step S4203. If the effect control microcomputer 91 determines in step S4203 that the waiting time has elapsed in the customer waiting effect execution process, it sets a customer waiting effect start command for starting the customer waiting effect in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

[Start-up winning process]
Next, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG. In the start winning process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first stores the received start winning command in the starting winning command hold storage unit 95 in the RAM 94 (S4401). Here, the production control microcomputer 91 stores the first start winning command hold storage unit 951 in the start winning command hold storage unit 95 in the case of the first start winning command. On the other hand, the production control microcomputer 91 stores the second start winning command hold storage unit 952 in the start winning command hold storage unit 95 in the case of the second start winning command. The first start winning command hold storage unit 951 and the second start winning command hold storage unit 952 are configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 reservation storage part 851 and the special figure 2 reservation storage part 852 of the RAM 84.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the stored start winning command is the first starting winning command (S4402). If it is not the first start winning command (NO in S4402), the process proceeds to step S4413. If it is the first starting winning command (YES in S4402), the production control microcomputer 91 uses the special figure 1 hold number provided in the RAM 94. The special figure 1 holding number counter to be represented is incremented by “1” (S4403), and it is determined whether or not it is currently in the normal performance mode (S4404). Here, if it is not the normal effect mode (NO in S4404), the start winning process is completed, and if it is the normal effect mode (YES in S4404), the normal mode corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension related to the first start winning command is displayed. A special figure 1 hold icon display start command for displaying the special figure 1 hold icon is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4405). When the set special figure 1 hold icon display start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103, and The special-type special figure 1 hold icon is displayed on the display unit 7a. The special figure 1 hold icon is a predetermined position (the first area 73a1 to the fourth area 73a4) of the hold display area 73a corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold including the special figure 1 hold related to the stored first start winning command. Any).

  Subsequently, based on the information indicated by the first start winning command stored in step S4401 (presence / absence information and special figure variation pattern information), whether or not to execute the hold change advance notice and the hold change for determining the execution time when executed A pending change notice determination table for making a notice determination is selected (S4406). In the following, the success / failure information and the special figure variation pattern information indicated by the first start winning command are referred to as “preliminary determination result information”. As shown in FIGS. 72 to 77, the hold change notice determination table is associated with the advance determination result information (whether information and special figure variation pattern information) indicated by the first start winning command and the current special figure 1 hold number. A plurality are provided. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 91 has one hold change advance notice determination table associated with the prior determination result information (whether information and special figure variation pattern information) indicated by the first start winning command and the current special figure 1 hold number. select.

  In each hold change notice determination table, a hold change notice determination random number value (hold change notice) is added to the hold change notice execution pattern so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (described in FIGS. 72 to 77). (Execution pattern judgment value) is distributed. The pending change notice execution pattern includes a pending change notice execution pattern 01 to a pending change notice execution pattern 04 indicating execution of a pending change notice and a pending change notice execution pattern 05 indicating non-execution of a pending change notice. . The hold change advance notice execution pattern 01 to the hold change advance notice execution pattern 04 are respectively the execution time of the hold change notice (the “on winning” and “next” in the columns of “change timing of the hold icon” in FIGS. 72 to 77). ”,“ 2nd change ”and“ 3rd change ”). Specifically, the hold change notice execution pattern 01 is a hold change notice when the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the first start winning command stored in step S4401 occurs, that is, immediately after the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. Represents executing. The pending change notice execution pattern 02 represents that a pre-reading effect is executed during the special figure fluctuation display to be started next (indicated as “next fluctuation” in FIGS. 72 to 77). The hold change notice execution pattern 03 represents that the hold change notice is executed during the special figure change display that is started one after another (indicated as “second change after” in FIGS. 72 to 77). The hold change notice execution pattern 04 represents that the hold change notice is executed during the special figure change display that is started one after another (indicated as “3rd change” in FIGS. 72 to 77).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 91 acquires the value indicated by the hold change notice determination random number counter as the hold change notice determination random number (S4407), and performs the hold change notice determination based on the acquired hold change notice determination random number. Perform (S4408).

  In the hold change notice determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 collates the hold change notice determination random number acquired in step S4407 against the table selected in step S4406, and determines the hold change notice execution pattern.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the result of the hold change notice determination in step S4409 is the execution of the hold change notice (S4409). If it is not the execution of the hold change notice (NO in S4409), the start winning process is terminated, and if it is the execution of the hold change notice (YES in S4409), the hold change notice data representing the hold change notice execution pattern is stepped. In association with the first start winning command stored in S4401, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4410). It is determined whether the pending change notice data representing the change notice execution pattern 01 is set (S4411). If the execution time of the hold change notice is not at the time of winning (NO in S4411), the start winning process is terminated, and if the execution time of the hold change notice is at the time of winning (YES in S4411), the hold icon display mode is special. A winning change change notice start command indicating that a change is to be made, that is, a hold change notice using a hold icon to be displayed from now on is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4412), and a start winning process is performed. Finish. When the winning hold change notice start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 in step S4413, at that time, the special figure 1 hold icon display start command and the winning hold change notice start command are set in the output buffer. However, immediately after the special figure 1 hold icon display start command is output to the image control board 100 first and the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed, the special figure 1 hold icon changes to the special form. To do.

  Further, if the start winning command stored in step S4401 is not the first start winning command (NO in S4402), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode (S4413). Here, if it is not the normal performance mode (NO in S4413), the start winning process is completed, and if it is the normal performance mode (YES in S4413), during the auxiliary game indicating that the long open auxiliary game is in the normal game state It is determined whether or not the flag is ON (S4414). If the auxiliary game flag is not ON (NO in S4414), the start winning process is completed, and if the auxiliary game flag is ON (YES in S4414), an auxiliary means that the connection effect during the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not the connection effect flag during the game is ON (S4415). If the connection effect flag during the auxiliary game is ON (YES in S4415), the start winning process is completed. If the connection effect flag during the auxiliary game is not ON (NO in S4415), the special figure 1 variable is currently being displayed. It is determined whether or not (S4416). If the special figure 1 variable display is not in progress (NO in S4416), the start winning process is completed, and if the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (YES in S4416), the auxiliary game is in progress indicating that the connection effect during the auxiliary game is started. The connection effect start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4417), the auxiliary effect connection effect flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4418), and the start winning process is completed.

  When the set auxiliary game in-game effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 causes the image related to the in-game auxiliary game effect to be output from the control ROM 103. , And the connection effect during the auxiliary game is started on the display unit 7a of the image display device 7.

[Special figure variation production start processing]
Next, the special figure variation effect start process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure fluctuation production start process, the production control microcomputer 91 first stores the received special figure fluctuation start command in the special figure fluctuation pattern storage unit 97 in the RAM 94 (S4501).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 finally combines the combination of effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 (hereinafter referred to as “stop effect symbols”) and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 (hereinafter referred to as “stop effect symbols”). Stop symbol determination processing for determining “stop small symbol” is performed (S4502). In the first embodiment, the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is always performed when the special symbol stop display is performed, but there are cases where the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are not displayed. is there. In the stop symbol determination process, first, the contents of the stop special symbol (big hit symbol type, small bonus symbol type, loss special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol change start command indicate Based on the variation pattern, a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing stop symbol determination for determining a stop effect symbol and a small stop symbol is selected. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 91 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop symbol type and the special symbol variation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) is distributed to a plurality of stop effect symbols and stop symbols so as to have a predetermined distribution ratio (%). ing. Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number. In the stop symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 compares the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number with the selected stop symbol pattern table, and determines the stop symbol (stop effect symbol and stop small symbol). Data representing the stopped symbols (stop effect symbols and stop small symbols) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs special figure variation effect pattern determination processing for determining the effect content (variation effect pattern) of the special figure variation effect (S4503). In the special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination process, the random number for determining the special figure fluctuation effect pattern is acquired, and from among the special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination tables provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern, By selecting one table based on the special drawing fluctuation pattern indicated by the current production mode and the special figure fluctuation start command, and determining the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation production pattern determination by using the selected table, A special figure variation effect pattern is determined. Once the special figure variation production pattern is determined, the variation production time, production pattern variation display mode, presence / absence of reach production, contents of reach production, presence / absence of operation promotion production, content of operation promotion production, production deployment configuration, etc. The production contents of the variable production made up of types and the like are determined.

  As an example of the special figure change effect pattern, FIG. 78 shows a special figure change effect pattern determination table for the special figure 2 change pattern in the normal effect mode. Here, the effect content of the special figure variation effect in FIG. 78 is associated with the effect content of the last challenge effect, that is, the content of the attack of the main character. In addition, “→” is written in the production contents of the V challenge second half revival jackpot fluctuation, the V challenge second half revival small hit fluctuation, and the V challenge second half revival loser fluctuation. Is described. This is because, in the special figure fluctuation production according to these special figure fluctuation patterns, the revival challenge production is performed and the last challenge production is performed twice, so the attack content on the left side of “→” is the first last The attack content in the challenge effect is represented, and the attack content on the right side of “→” represents the attack content in the second last challenge effect.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a special figure change effect start command indicating the effect contents of the special figure change effect including the determined stop symbol and special figure change effect pattern in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4504). In the special figure change effect start command, in addition to the special figure change effect by the image performed by the image display device 7, the special figure change effect by the sound output from the speaker 67 and the special figure change by light emission performed by the frame lamp 66 are included. The contents of the effects of the effects and the contents of the effects of the special figure variation effect by the operation performed by the movable board body 15K are included. When the special figure variation effect start command set in step S4504 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103. In the display unit 7a of the image display device 7, a special figure variation effect is performed using an image. The effect control microcomputer 91 also displays the special figure variation effect contents indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 100 while the special figure change effect by the image performed by the image control board 100 is being performed. In response to this, a sound is output from the speaker 67 via the sound control circuit 106 (a special figure variation effect is executed by sound), and a frame lamp 66 is emitted via the lamp control circuit 107 (a special figure due to light emission). The variation effect is executed) and the movable board body 15K is operated (the special figure variation effect is executed by the operation).

  Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation production timer as the special figure fluctuation production time (special figure fluctuation production time), and the special figure fluctuation production starts. Measurement of the time that has elapsed since the start (special drawing variation effect elapsed time) is started (S4505). The special figure fluctuation effect time set in the special figure fluctuation effect timer is updated every 10 ms by 10 ms by the effect timer update process in step S4202. The production control microcomputer 91 can recognize the special figure fluctuation production elapsed time by the special figure fluctuation production timer.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a warning effect gasset execution determination process for determining whether or not the warning effect gasset can be executed (S4506). Here, the indication effect determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The production control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the current production mode is the normal production mode in the precursor production gasses execution determination process (S4601). This is because the warning effect gaze is an effect performed in the normal effect mode. If it is not the normal performance mode (NO in S4601), the sign production performance execution determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special figure variation production start process in step S4306. If it is the normal performance mode (YES in S4601), the special performance to be started from now on. It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the figure fluctuation effect is a normal loss fluctuation (S4602). This is because the warning effect gaze is an effect that is normally performed as a special figure change effect of a loss change. If it is not normal loss fluctuation (NO in S4602), the sign production effect execution determination process ends, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation production start process in step S4306. The value indicated by the random number counter for use is acquired as a random number for determining the predecessor effect gasset execution (S4603), and the predecessor effect gasase execution determination is performed based on the acquired random number for determining the predecessor effect gasase execution (S4604).

  The precursor effect gase execution determination is performed using a precursor effect gase execution determination table stored in the ROM 93. In the first embodiment, one precursor effect gasse execution determination table is provided. In the precursor effect gasse execution determination table, a random value for the precursor effect gasse execution determination (prediction effect gasse execution determination value) is set to indicate whether or not the precursor effect gaze is executed so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (described in FIG. 79). (Execution judgment value) is distributed. The effect control microcomputer 91 collates the sign effect gase execution determination table with the sign effect gase execution determination random number acquired in step S4603, and determines whether or not the sign effect gase is executable.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the result of the precursor effect gase execution determination in step S4604 is the execution of the precursor effect gase (S4605). If it is not execution of the warning effect gaze (NO in S4605), the warning effect gaze execution determination process is finished, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation effect start processing in step S4306. A start effect display start command indicating the start of the start effect effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4606). In addition to the warning effect gaze based on the image performed on the image display device 7, the warning effect gaze start command includes the warning effect gaze due to the sound output from the speaker 67 and the warning effect gaze due to the light emitted from the frame lamp 66. Production content of production content is included. When the indication effect gasset start command set in step S4605 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the special figure variation effect to be started. When 1 second has elapsed, a display effect 7 is performed on the display unit 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the effect contents of the sign effect gaze indicated by the sign effect stapling start command transmitted to the image control board 100 while the sign effect gaze by the image performed by the image control board 100 is being performed. In response, sound is output from the speaker 67 via the sound control circuit 106 (speech effect gaze by sound is executed), and the frame lamp 66 is caused to emit light via the lamp control circuit 107 (prediction effect gaze due to light emission). Run).

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a sign effect flag indicating that the sign effect gasses are being executed in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4607), and indicates the time required for the sign effect gasses (the sign effect time effect). Set in the production gaze timer, start measuring the elapsed time (precursor production gaze elapsed time) after the start of the prelude production gaze (S4608), end the prelude production gase execution determination process, and change the special figure in step S4306 Return to the production start process. Note that the warning effect gasset time set in the warning effect gasset effect timer is updated every 10 ms by 10 ms by the effect timer update processing in step S4202. The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize the indication effect gasses elapsed time by the indication effect gasses timer.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command stored in step S4501 in the special figure fluctuation production start processing, and from now on, the special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display. It is determined whether or not the figure fluctuation effect is started, in other words, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display is started (S4507). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display is not started (NO in S4507), the special figure fluctuation production start processing is finished. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display is started (YES in S4507), the auxiliary production in-game production flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is ON (S4508). If the transition effect flag in the auxiliary game is not ON (NO in S4508), the special figure variation effect start processing is completed. (S4509), the electric chew non-winning effect prohibition flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4510), and the special figure variation effect start processing is finished. This is because when the auxiliary game is being executed, the special figure 2 variable display is started and the second half of the challenge effect to V is being executed, but when the auxiliary game ends, the electric chew non-winning effect is displayed. This is to prevent it from being started.

[Hold icon shift process]
Next, the hold icon shift process will be described with reference to FIG. In the hold icon shift process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first sets a hold icon shift start command in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4701). When the set hold icon shift start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays all the information displayed in the hold display area 73a of the display unit 7a. Each hold icon is moved to the left, in other words, the hold order related to each hold icon is reduced by one.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 starts the special figure variation effect to be started from now on the basis of the hold order related to each start prize command stored and the hold change notice data associated with each start prize command. In step S4702, it is determined whether or not to make a pending change notice. If no hold change notice is made (NO in S4702), the process proceeds to step S4708, and if a hold change notice is made (YES in S4702), the special figure change production time of the special figure change production to be started will be a special figure of normal C loss change. It is determined whether or not it is longer than the fluctuation time (4 seconds) (S4703). This is because if the special figure fluctuation effect time of the special figure fluctuation effect becomes longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation, it is not possible to execute the on-change pending change notice with the pre-change indication effect. This is because the type of pending change notice that can be executed differs depending on whether or not it is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation. In addition, the production time of the pre-announcement effect is set to 4 seconds.

  If the special figure fluctuation production time of the special figure fluctuation production to be started from now is not longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation (NO in S4703), a hold change notice start command at the time of shift is set (S4707), and the hold icon Finish the shift process. When the set shift-time hold change notice start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 shifts the hold icon that is the target of the hold change notice. At this time, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (a shift change advance notice is executed when shifting).

  On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation effect time of the special figure fluctuation effect to be started is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation (YES in S4703), the value indicated by the random number counter for hold change notice type determination is indicated by the hold change notice. It is acquired as a type determination random number (S4704), and based on the acquired hold change notice type determination random number, hold change notice type determination is performed (S4705).

  The hold change notice type determination is performed using a hold change notice type determination table stored in the ROM 93. In the first embodiment, one hold change notice type determination table is provided. As shown in FIG. 80, in the hold change notice type determination table, a hold change notice type determination random value (hold change notice type determination value) is added to the hold change notice type so that a predetermined distribution rate (%) is obtained. ) Is distributed. In the first embodiment, the hold change notice type determination value is distributed by 50% to the hold change notice during shift and the change notice during change. In the pending change advance notice type determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 collates the hold change advance notice type determination random number acquired in step S4704 with the hold change advance notice type determination table to determine the hold change advance notice type.

  Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs a hold change notice notice start command (a hold change notice notice start command or a hold change notice notice during change) corresponding to the hold change notice type determined in step S4705 to the output buffer of the RAM 94. (S4706), and the hold icon shift process ends. When the set change pending hold advance notice start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 holds it one second after the start of the special figure change effect. The change sign effect is started, and the display mode of the hold icon that is the target of the hold change notice is changed from the normal form to the special form (the change pending notice of change is executed).

  When it is determined in step S4702 that the pending change notice is not to be performed (NO in S4702), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode (S4708). If it is not the normal effect mode (NO in S4708), the hold icon shift process is finished, and if it is the normal effect mode (YES in S4708), it is determined whether or not the challenge effect to V is being executed (S4709). If the challenge to V is being executed (YES in S4709), the hold icon shift process is completed, and if the challenge to V is not being executed (NO in S4709), the special figure 1 hold number is “1” or more. It is determined whether or not there is a hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (S4710). If the special figure 1 hold number is not “1” or more (NO in S4710), the hold icon shift process is completed, and if the special figure 1 hold number is “1” or more (YES in S4710), the special figure change to be started It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation production time of the production is longer than the special figure fluctuation time (4 seconds) of the normal C loss fluctuation (S4711). This is because, if the special figure fluctuation effect time of the special figure fluctuation effect is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation, it is not possible to execute the pre-warming sign effect gash during the special figure fluctuation effect.

  If the special figure fluctuation production time of the special figure fluctuation production to be started is not longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation (NO in S4711), the hold icon shift processing is finished, and the special figure fluctuation production special to be started from now on. If the figure fluctuation production time is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation (YES in S4711), the value indicated by the random number counter for the pre-change indication effect gasset execution determination is acquired as the random number for the pre-change indication effect gouge execution determination ( (S4712), based on the acquired random number for the execution of the pre-announcement sign effect gaze execution, the execution of the pre-change sign effect gase is determined (S4713).

  The pre-warming sign effect gasset execution determination is performed using the pre-warming sign effect gasase execution determination table stored in the ROM 93. In the first embodiment, there are provided four pre-warming indication effect gasset execution determination tables in association with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. As shown in FIG. 81, each maintenance change sign effect gasset execution determination table includes a random number for determining whether or not the predictive effect effect gasset execution is determined according to whether or not the predictive effect effect gasset execution is possible. (Indication value of the pre-announcement effect production determination value) is assigned. The production control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command stored in step S4501 in the execution of the pre-announcement sign production gasase execution judgment, and the maintenance change associated with the jackpot judgment result and the reach judgment result. Select the signage effect gaze execution determination table, and collate the random number for execution of the prehension indication effect gasset execution determination table acquired in step S4712 with the selected changeover sign effectation gasset execution determination table to determine whether or not the execution of the prediction effect effect gasset execution is possible. To do.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the result of the execution of the maintenance sign effect gaze is execution of the maintenance sign effect gase (S4714). If it is not the execution of the pre-announcement effect gaze (NO in S4714), the on-hold icon shift process is completed, and if the pre-predictive effect production gaze is being executed (YES in S4714), the pre-indication of the pre-announcement effect display gaze is shown. An effect gasase start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4715), and the hold icon shift process is completed. When the set pre-change indication effect gasset start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 keeps it one second after the start of the special figure change effect. The change sign production gaze is started.

[Precursor production restriction processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the warning effect restriction process related to the restriction of the warning effect A will be described. The production control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the indication effect flag is ON in the indication effect regulation processing (S4801). If the sign effect flag is not ON (NO in S4801), the sign effect control process is completed, and if the sign effect flag is ON (YES in S4801), a sign effect restriction flag indicating that the sign effect A is restricted. Turns ON in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4802), sets the time (predictive effect restriction time) for restricting the prelude effect to the prelude effect restriction timer, and starts measuring the time elapsed after the prelude effect is restricted (S4803). ), A sign production restriction start command indicating that the sign production is regulated is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4804), and the sign production regulation processing is terminated.

  The sign production restriction time is set to be the same as the special figure confirmation time of the special figure stop display to be performed from now on. The warning effect restriction time set in the warning effect restriction timer is updated every 10 ms by 10 ms by the effect timer update process in step S4202. The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize the elapsed time after the sign effect A is regulated by the sign effect regulation timer. Further, when the set indication effect regulation start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 is in a stop display as shown in FIG. The reduced screen image G10 is displayed in a range that is smaller than the normal precursor effect A and does not overlap with the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 as much as possible so that the contents of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 can be easily seen. For example, the second background image G111 for a precursor effect and the title image G9 to be displayed in the normal area of the display unit 7a are displayed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area).

[Reduced screen display end determination processing]
Next, a reduced screen display end determination process for determining whether or not to end the display of the reduced screen image G10 related to the challenge effect to V will be described with reference to FIG. In the reduction screen display end determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a challenge effect for V is currently being executed (S4901). This is because the reduced screen image G10 can be displayed during the execution of the challenge effect to V. In addition, the challenge effect to V here also includes a connection effect (an auxiliary game connection effect and a special effect 1 connection change effect).

  If the challenge control microcomputer 91 is not executing the challenge effect to V (NO in S4901), the reduction screen display end determination processing is finished. If the challenge effect to V is being executed (YES in S4901), the effect is reduced. It is determined whether or not the special display stop display target related to the special figure change stop command resulting from the screen display end determination process is the special figure 1 (S4902). This is because the display of the reduced screen image G10 is terminated with the stop display in FIG. If it is not the special figure 1 (NO in S4902), the process proceeds to step S4907. If it is the special figure 1 (YES in S4902), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 that has been stopped is a jackpot symbol (S4903).

  If it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S4903), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a challenge effect end command to V indicating that the challenge effect to V is forcibly ended in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4904), and reduces it. A reduced screen display end command indicating that display of the screen image G10 is to be ended is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4906), and the reduced screen display end determination processing is ended. In addition, the supplementary game connection effect is included in the challenge effect to V here.

  When the set reduced screen display end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 receives the special figure determination time after receiving the command. Then, the reduced screen image G10 displayed on the display unit 7a is deleted, and the display unit 7a is returned from the special state to the normal state. When the set challenge end command to V is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the reduced screen display end command set in step S4906. With the deletion of the reduced screen image G10 according to the above, the challenge effect to V is forcibly terminated. Therefore, even if the challenge effect for V is being executed, if the winner is won, the challenge effect for V is forcibly terminated and the jackpot game effect is started.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 1 that has been stopped is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S4903), whether or not the special figure 2 hold number = 1, that is, when the special figure confirmation time has elapsed since the special figure fluctuation display stopped. It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display can be started (S4905). If the special figure 2 hold count = 1 (YES in S4905), the process proceeds to step S4906, and if the special figure 2 hold count = 1 is not set (NO in S4905), the reduced screen display end determination process ends.

  In step S4907, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure 2 that is stopped is a lost special figure. If it is not a loss special figure (NO in S4907), the production control microcomputer 91 finishes the reduced screen display end determination process. If it is a special figure (YES in S4907), whether or not special figure 2 hold number = 1 is satisfied. Is determined (S4908). If special figure 2 hold count is not 1 (NO in S4908), the reduced screen display end determination process is completed. If special figure 2 hold count is 1 (YES in S4908), the second special figure 2 variable display is accepted. The second start command for the second half of the challenge presentation to V indicating the start of the second half of the challenge presentation to V is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4909), and the reduced screen display end determination process is terminated. When the second start command in the latter half of the challenge effect to set V is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 responds to the following special figure 2 fluctuation display. When the second half of the challenge effect to V (special drawing variation effect) is started, the last challenge number notification image G24 indicating the number of times of the last challenge is displayed on the display unit 7a. Specifically, if the first half of the challenge presentation to V is the second half of the challenge presentation to normal V, the number of times of the last challenge performed first in the second half of the challenge presentation to V will be “second ”, The last challenge count notification image G24 representing“ 2ND ”representing two times is displayed. On the other hand, if the latter half of the first challenge production to V is the second half of the challenge production to the revival V, the number of times of the last challenge performed first in the second half of the second challenge production to V is “third”. Therefore, the last challenge number notification image G24 representing “3rd” representing three times is displayed.

[Normal figure change effect judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of a normal variation effect determination process for determining whether or not a normal variation effect (the first half of the prelude effect + V challenge effect or the like) is executed and the content of the effect when it is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode in the normal fluctuation effect determination process (S5001). This is because the usual map change effect is an effect performed in the normal effect mode.

  If the effect control microcomputer 91 is not in the normal effect mode (NO in S5001), it ends the ordinary figure change effect determination process. It is determined whether or not it is being displayed (S5002). This is for restricting (prohibiting) the execution of the usual figure change effect during the special game, which is advantageous to the player, with the opening of the special winning openings 30 and 32. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display is being performed in order to restrict (prohibit) the execution of the normal figure fluctuation effect during the special figure 2 variable display since the second half of the challenge effect to V is being performed.

  If it is during special game or special figure 2 variable display (YES in S5002), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends the normal figure variation effect determination process and is not during special game or special figure 2 variable display ( NO in S5002), based on the information (common pattern variation pattern) indicated by the universal variation start command stored in the reception buffer by the reception interrupt process, the universal variation display to be started will be the normal symbol of symbol A or symbol B It is determined whether or not the display is variable (S5003). If the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B is a normal symbol fluctuation display (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not the number of special symbols 1 held is “1” or more (S5004). This is because when the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B is displayed as a normal symbol variation, the precursor effect or the first half of the challenge effect to V is performed. If the number of special figure 1 hold is “1” or more (YES in S5004), select a precursor effect type determination table for special figure 1 hold (S5005) and proceed to step S5007. If it is not 1 ”or more (NO in S5004), the sign production type determination table for the special figure 1 no hold is selected (S5006), and the process proceeds to step S5007.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in each precursor effect type determination table, the predictor effect types (predictor effect A and predictor effect B) are indicated in advance so as to have a predetermined distribution ratio (described in FIG. 82). Random values for effect type determination (prediction effect type determination value) are distributed. The sign effect types include a sign effect A with a stepwise reduction of the reduced screen image G10 and a sign effect B with a maintenance sign effect.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value indicated by the sign effect type determination random number counter as the sign effect type determination random number (S5007), and performs the sign effect type determination based on the acquired sign effect type determination random number. Perform (S5008).

  The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the sign effect type by collating the sign effect type determination random number acquired in step S5007 against the sign effect type determination table selected in step S5005 or step S5006 in the sign effect type determination.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the sign effect type data indicating the sign effect type in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S5009), and proceeds to step S5010.

  In step S5010, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal map variation display to be started is a normal symbol variation display of the symbol A. If the winning symbol A is a normal symbol variation display (YES in S5010), the first challenge effect pattern determination table for the winning symbol A is selected (S5011), and the process proceeds to step S5013, where the winning symbol A normal symbol variation display is required. If (NO in S5010), the first challenge effect pattern determination table for winning symbol B is selected (S5012), and the process proceeds to step S5013.

  As shown in FIG. 83, each first challenge effect pattern determination table includes a first challenge effect pattern determination table in which the first challenge effect pattern determination table has a predetermined distribution ratio (described in FIG. 83). A random value (first challenge effect pattern determination value) is assigned. The first challenge production pattern includes a first challenge production pattern 01 to a first challenge production pattern 03 indicating the production contents of the first challenge production. The first challenge effect pattern 01 represents that the color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is red. The first challenge effect pattern 02 represents that the color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is green. The first challenge effect pattern 03 represents that the color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is white.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value indicated by the first challenge effect pattern determination random number counter as a first challenge effect pattern determination random number (S5013), and based on the acquired first challenge effect pattern determination random number, A performance pattern is determined (S5014).

  In the first challenge effect pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 compares the first challenge effect pattern determination random number acquired in step S5013 against the first challenge effect pattern determination table selected in step S5011 or step S5012, and the first challenge effect pattern To decide.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets first challenge effect data representing the first challenge effect pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S5015), the determination result of the sign effect type determination (the sign effect type) in step S5008, and step S5014. An ordinary diagram change effect start command including a determination result of the first challenge effect pattern determination (first challenge effect pattern) or the like is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5016) to indicate that the sign effect is being executed. The effect flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S5017), the effect time of the precursor effect (predictor effect time) is set in the predictor effect timer, and measurement of the time elapsed after the start of the predictor effect is started (S5018). Then, the ordinary figure variation effect determination process is terminated.

  The warning effect time set in the warning effect timer is updated every 10 ms by 10 ms by the effect timer update process in step S4202. The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize the elapsed time from the start of the sign effect by the sign effect timer. Further, when the set ordinary figure change effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103, and An ordinary map change effect by an image is performed on the display unit 7 a of the image display device 7. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the normal map change effect indicated by the normal map change effect start command transmitted to the image control board 100 while the normal map change effect by the image performed by the image control board 100 is being performed. Depending on the contents of the production, the voice is output from the speaker 67 via the voice control circuit 106 (the normal figure fluctuation effect by voice is executed, and the special figure fluctuation effect by voice is switched to the normal figure fluctuation effect by voice). The frame lamp 66 is caused to emit light via the lamp control circuit 107 (a normal figure change effect by light emission is executed, and a special figure change effect by light emission is switched to a normal figure change effect by light emission).

[Processing at the start of auxiliary games]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the auxiliary game start process in response to the start of the long opening auxiliary game will be described. In the auxiliary game start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode (S5101). If it is not the normal performance mode (NO in S5101), the auxiliary game start processing is completed, and if it is the normal performance mode (YES in S5101), it will be started based on the information (hit symbol type) indicated by the winning opening command. It is determined whether or not the auxiliary game is an auxiliary game corresponding to the symbol A (long opening auxiliary game) (S5102). If the winning game is not the winning game with the winning symbol A (NO in S5102), the auxiliary game start processing is finished. If the winning game is the winning game with the winning symbol A (YES in S5102), the auxiliary game corresponding to the winning symbol A in the normal gaming state ( The auxiliary game in-progress flag indicating that the long open auxiliary game is being executed is turned ON in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S5103), and the auxiliary game start process is terminated.

[Processing at the end of an auxiliary game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a description will be given of the auxiliary game end process in response to the end of the auxiliary game in which the electric chew 23 is long opened in the normal performance mode. In the auxiliary game end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the auxiliary game in-progress flag is ON (S5201). If the auxiliary game flag is not ON (NO in S5201), the process at the end of the auxiliary game is completed. If the auxiliary game flag is ON (YES in S5201), the auxiliary game flag is turned OFF (S5202) It is determined whether or not the connection effect flag during the game is ON (S5203). If the auxiliary game in-game effect flag is not ON (NO in S5203), the process proceeds to step S5207. If the auxiliary game in-game flag is ON (YES in S5203), the auxiliary game in-game effect flag is turned OFF (S5204), and now Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is in progress (S5205).

  The effect control microcomputer 91 finishes the process at the end of the auxiliary game if the special figure 1 fluctuation display is not in progress (NO in S5205), and if the special figure 1 fluctuation display is in progress (YES in S5205), the special figure 1 fluctuation connection is made. A special effect connection start command for changing the special figure 1 showing the contents of the effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5206), and the auxiliary game end processing is ended. When the set special effect 1 changing command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103. In the display unit 7 a of the image display device 7, a connection effect is performed during fluctuation of the special figure 1.

  In step S5207, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the electric chew non-winning effect prohibition flag is ON. If the electric-chu non-winning effect prohibition flag is ON (YES in S5207), the electric-chu non-winning effect prohibition flag is turned OFF (S5208), the auxiliary game end processing is finished, and the electric-chu non-winning effect prohibition flag is ON. If not (NO in S5207), an electric chew non-winning effect start command indicating the contents of the electric chew non-winning effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5209), and the auxiliary game end processing is ended. When the set electric chew non-winning effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103, and An electric chew non-winning effect is performed on the display unit 7a of the display device 7.

[Precursor effect regulation release determination processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 71, a description will be given of a precursor effect restriction release determination process for releasing the restriction of the restricted precursor effect A. The production control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the indication effect restriction flag is ON in the indication effect restriction release determination processing (S5301).

  The production control microcomputer 91 finishes the indication production restriction release determination process if the indication production restriction flag is not ON (NO in S5301). If the indication production restriction flag is ON (YES in S5301), the indication production A is restricted. Whether or not it is time to cancel the restriction of the sign production, in other words, the sign production restriction timer set to 0 in step S4803. It is determined whether or not (S5302).

  The production control microcomputer 91 finishes the precursor production regulation release determination process if the precursor presentation regulation time has not elapsed (NO in S5302), and if the precursor presentation regulation time has elapsed (YES in S5302), the precursor presentation regulation. The flag is turned off (S5303), a precursor effect restriction end command indicating that the restriction of the precursor effect A is to be ended (released) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5304), and the precursor effect restriction release determination process is ended.

  When the set indication effect restriction end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the effect symbol displayed in the normal area of the display unit 7a. EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are erased, and the second background image G111 for a prelude effect and the title image G9 are displayed in the normal area of the display unit 7a in the same manner as the normal prelude effect A, and the first background image for the predecessor effect is displayed. A reduced screen image G10 including G110 is displayed (see FIG. 36C). It should be noted that the reduced screen image G10 including the first background image G110 for the indication effect displayed at this time displays the continuation from the point in time when the indication effect A is not restricted.

7). Other Modification Examples Hereinafter, with respect to the gaming machine of the present invention, a modification example of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, an image display device 7 is provided as a device capable of displaying an image. When the normal symbol variation display of the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B is started in the image display device 7, a reduced screen is displayed. The image G10 is displayed, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the normal background image G100, and the icons HA1 to HA4 that are displayed on the display unit 7a before the reduced screen image G10 is displayed are reduced screen images G10 as special regions. In the normal area where these images are displayed, a precursor effect, a challenge to V, and a joint effect are performed. However, the destination of moving the design symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the normal background image G100, and the icons HA1 to HA4 is not limited to the reduced screen image G10 as a special area. For example, on the game board 2, in addition to the image display device 7, a display device that is smaller than the image display device 7 and can display an image is provided at a predetermined position (for example, a position where the board movable body 15K is provided). When the display unit 7a is displayed on the front side of the upper end of the display unit 7a, the lower end of the display unit 7a, the left side or the front side of the right unit), and the normal symbol change display of the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B is started. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the normal background image G100, and the icons HA1 to HA4 that have been performed on the display unit 7a until then are moved to the display device, and the special figure variation that has been performed so far on the display device. It is possible to continue the production and the hold production. Further, display devices other than the image display device 7 may be provided not on the game board 2 but on the upper plate 61 so that the display surface thereof is substantially flush with the upper surface of the upper plate 61. That is, a display device other than the image display device 7 may be provided at a position where a player who views the display unit 7a is more difficult to see than the display unit 7a.

  Further, in the first embodiment, a normal diagram change effect that fails in the first challenge effect when the normal symbol change display of the winning symbol B for generating the short opening assist game is performed, but this normal change effect is performed. Is not limited to the normal symbol fluctuation display of the winning symbol B. For example, the type of winning symbol is only winning symbol A, and the normal symbol change time (for example, 1 second) prohibits execution of the first challenge effect and the first challenge effect is executed in the normal symbol change time at the time of the loss There is a possible normal time change time (for example, 25 seconds), and a normal time change time in which the first challenge effect can be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%) may be selected.

  Further, in the first embodiment, one type of each of the normal symbol variation time of the winning symbol A and one of the common symbol variation time of the winning symbol B is set, but a plurality of types are set for both or any one of them. May be determined by a predetermined lottery. In other words, a plurality of effect times for the sign effect and the first challenge effect (the first half of the challenge effect to V) may be set. In this case, for example, the expectation level that the long opening assist game is executed may be higher when the presentation time of the first challenge presentation (first half of the challenge challenge to V) is longer. In addition, the expectation degree that the challenge effect to V is executed may be higher when the effect time of the sign effect is longer.

  Further, in the first embodiment, one kind of special figure change time is set for each of the latter half success of the normal V challenge production and the second half failure of the normal production challenge, but there are plural kinds of both or one of them. A plurality of types may be set and determined by a predetermined lottery. That is, a plurality of effect times for the last challenge effect (the latter half of the challenge effect for normal V) may be set. In this case, for example, the expectation level that the special game is executed may be higher when the last challenge effect (the latter half of the challenge effect to the normal V) is longer. The same applies to the second half of the production of the challenge to Resurrection V.

  In the first embodiment, only an auxiliary game corresponding to the winning symbol A is set as an auxiliary game in which a game ball can easily enter the second start port 22, but the opening time of the second start port 22 is different. A plurality of auxiliary games may be set. For example, an auxiliary game in which the second start port 22 is opened once for 2.5 seconds (disadvantageous long open assist game) and an auxiliary game in which the second start port 22 is opened twice for 2.5 seconds (advantageous long) Open assist game) may be provided. In this case, the winning symbol for generating the disadvantageous long opening assist game may be different from the winning symbol for generating the advantageous long opening assist game. Further, in this case, the degree of expectation for the execution of the advantageous long opening assist game may be suggested by the first half of the challenge effect to V (for example, the first challenge effect) and the effect content / effect time of the sign effect.

  Although only one type of V-pass small hit game is set, a plurality of types of V-pass small hit games having different ease of V-pass may be provided. For example, a game with the same opening time but an OP time of 0.008 seconds and a V pass small hit game (advantageous V pass small hit game) and a V pass small hit game with an OP time of 3.7 seconds (adverse V pass) A small hit game). In this case, V is released for 4.6 seconds from the point when 0.008 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small hit opening, and therefore V passing small hit games with an OP time of 0.008 seconds are more likely to pass V. In this case, the degree of expectation for the execution of the advantageous V passing small hit game may be suggested by the production contents and production time of the latter half (for example, the last challenge production) of the normal V challenge production.

  In the first embodiment, the resurrection challenge effect can be executed in the second half of the challenge effect to V, but the resurrection challenge effect may not be provided. In addition, as in the case of the revival challenge production, instead of providing a case of success or failure in the second last challenge, from a temporary stop display of the production pattern showing the loss after failure in the first last challenge In the second half of the challenge production to V after the temporary stop display of the production pattern that shows the loss after the failure in the first challenge, enabling the execution of the notification production to inform the winning of the big hit or small win If this continues, it is possible to always notify the big win or the small win winning notification without losing.

  Further, the contents of the first half of the challenge to V and the second half of the challenge to V are not limited to the first embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. It suffices if the first half of the challenge to V and the second half of the challenge to V are related. Continuity that develops to the last challenge production (the last challenge) after the first challenge production (the first challenge) is not essential for the relevance here. From a broad perspective, the first half of the challenge production for V and the second half of the challenge production for V may be regarded as one production.

  In the first embodiment, the execution of the precursor effect is restricted during the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3, that is, during the special symbol stop display. As described above, the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 immediately before the stop display may be included. In this case, the restriction may be started when one of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 temporarily stops, and the restriction starts when all the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 are temporarily stopped. Also good.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the sign production A and the sign are used as the types of sign productions that suggest the degree of expectation for the execution of the challenge production to V (the first half of the challenge production to V) (expected degree of execution of the challenge production to V). Two types of effects B are provided, but there may be three or more types or one type. Further, in the first embodiment, there is no difference in the expected degree of challenge effect execution to V regardless of which type of precursor effect is performed (see FIG. 82), but the challenge effect execution expectation to V is expected depending on the type of precursor effect. You may comprise so that a degree may differ. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, there is only one type of indication effect of the indication effect A and the indication effect B, but a plurality of effect types may be set for both or one of them. In this case, it may be configured such that the expected degree of challenge effect execution to V differs depending on the effect mode of the sign effect, or may be configured to be the same.

  Further, in the first embodiment, execution of a pending change notice, execution of a challenge effect to V, or an effect in which any effect branches unexecuted, that is, a challenge effect to V (the first half of the challenge effect to V) There is one type of pre-announcement effect (prediction effect B) that also serves as a precursor effect, but a plurality of types may be provided. In this case, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for execution of the challenge effect on V varies depending on the effect type of the pre-announcement effect, or may be configured to be the same.

  In the first embodiment, the electric chew operation promotion effect is performed from the time when the normal map change display is performed, that is, as part of the normal map change effect. It may be executed along with the start of the opening assist game. In other words, in the normal variation production, a precursor production and a first challenge production may be performed.

  In addition, the sign effect is executed with the start of the normal map variable display, but the general map variable display is configured to be held like the special map variable display, and further, a general map related random number is acquired. Then, a command such as a start winning command is configured to be transmitted so that a pre-determined result can be specified, and based on information that can be acquired from the command, start of the normal symbol variation display of the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B You may make it possible to execute the sign effect from the front. Further, based on information that can be acquired from the command, the warning effect gaze may be executed when the normal symbol variation display of the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B is not performed.

  Further, in the first embodiment, during the long opening assist game, the electric chew non-winning effect is performed according to the fact that the game ball could not win the electric chew 23, but the electric chew non-winning effect is not provided. Also good. In addition, during the long opening assist game, the connection effect during the auxiliary game is performed in response to the game ball winning the electric Chu 23, but the connection effect during the auxiliary game is not executed, and as a connection effect, as shown in FIG. You may comprise so that only a connection effect may be performed during the fluctuation. It should be noted that the performance aspects of the electric-chu non-winning effect, the auxiliary game intermediate connection effect, and the special figure 1 variation intermediate connection effect are not limited to the first embodiment, and can be set as appropriate.

  In the first embodiment, the reduced screen image G10 (display unit 7a) is displayed during the period from the start of the precursor effect A to the start of the first challenge effect (FIGS. 24B to 25B-1). In the special area), the sign effect A in which the first background image G110 for sign effect is displayed, but the small symbols KZ1 to KZ1 displayed on the display unit 7a until immediately before the reduced screen image G10 is displayed. You may make it perform the special figure change effect except the variable display of KZ3.

  Further, in the first embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but at least one of them may not include the jackpot. In addition, the probability of winning a small bonus is the same in the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery, but the bonus game that is executed by the two types of big wins when the special drawing 2 lottery is won It may be set so that the specified number of time reductions in the later time reduction state increases. In addition, there are no two types of jackpots, and the special figure 2 lottery may be able to win a jackpot symbol that generates a jackpot game with a substantial number of round games with high probability. .

  Further, in the first embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing lottery (1 type jackpot) is constant, but the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal probability and the normal probability state of the normal probability. A high probability state with a high probability may be settable. In this case, there is a round game in which the second big prize opening 32 is opened during the jackpot game, and the specific area 34 can be opened while the second big prize opening 32 is opened. The game state after the game may be set to a high probability state. And there is a jackpot game that is relatively easy to pass V and a jackpot game that is relatively difficult to pass V, and the special figure 2 lottery wins the jackpot symbol that generates a jackpot game that easily passes V with higher probability. You may be able to do it. In addition, as a condition for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability state, it may be a type of jackpot symbol instead of V passing. In this case, the winning probability of the jackpot symbol set after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state is the same in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but the special figure 2 lottery is more effective. A jackpot symbol that generates a jackpot game with a large number of round games may be won with high probability.

  In paragraphs 0497 to 0498, the configuration in which the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageous to the player has been described, but this can be combined as appropriate so that the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageous to the player. You may do it.

  In the first embodiment, the time reduction state is always set with the end of the big hit game. However, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction state is set according to the type of the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol. good. In this case, the special figure 2 lottery may be able to win the jackpot symbol set with a short time state with a high probability with the end after the jackpot game.

  In the first embodiment, the sorting device 36 operates in a fixed manner from the start of the small hit game, in other words, the specific area 34 opens and closes in a fixed manner from the start of the small hit game. Although one type of opening / closing mode is set, a plurality of types of operating modes (opening / closing mode) are set, and the second big prize opening 32 is won (the second big prize port sensor 32a detects the game ball). ), The operation mode (opening / closing mode) may be switched.

  In the first embodiment, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed substantially in synchronism with the special symbol variable display. However, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 do not have three symbols. Alternatively, it may be composed of symbols other than three such as two. For example, you may provide two symbols divided by special figure 1 and special figure 2. Moreover, you may provide one symbol common in special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. In these cases, the image may be displayed on the display unit 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-control board 90 may perform the control. Moreover, you may provide the LED apparatus which displays a symbol in area | regions other than the game area 3 of the center decoration body 10 or the game board 2. FIG. In this case, the LED device may be controlled by the main control board 80 or the sub control board 90.

  In the first embodiment, the upper limit value of the special figure 1 hold number is “4” and the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold number is “1”, but the upper limit value is not limited to these values. You may set suitably. Moreover, in the first embodiment, the function for holding the variable variable display is not provided as with the variable variable display, but the variable variable display can also be held within a predetermined upper limit range. Also good. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide an upper limit for the number of special figure reservations and the number of special figure reservations.

  In the first embodiment, the special figure 2 suspension is preferentially digested, but the special figure 1 suspension may be preferentially digested. Further, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold may be digested in the order of occurrence.

  In the first embodiment, the main control board 80 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and performs basic control related to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (control of the game). As described above, the game control and the presentation control are performed on different boards, but may be configured to be performed on one board. In this case, the image control board 100 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be applied to other ball game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when a normal variation effect or an auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V) is performed, if one hit is made, the reduced screen image G10 is erased and the normal diagram variation effect or auxiliary The game effect (Challenge effect to V) is forcibly terminated, and the jackpot game effect is performed on the display portion 7a in the normal state. Here, the same applies to the case of two big hits. For example, when a normal game change effect or an auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V) is being executed, if V is passed in a small hit game (V non-passing small hit game) corresponding to the small hit symbol 1, the V When the big hit game based on the passage is started, the reduced screen image G10 is erased and the ordinary figure change effect or the auxiliary game effect (the challenge effect to V) is forcibly terminated, and the normal state display unit 7a. Assume that a jackpot game effect is performed.

  In addition, when the normal variation effect or the auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V) is performed, if the type 1 big hit or the type 2 big hit is made, the reduced screen image G10 is not deleted, that is, the display unit 7a is displayed. While maintaining the special state, the normal variation effect or the auxiliary game effect may be transferred to the reduced screen image G10 (special area) and executed as it is, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot game may be performed in the normal area. In addition, when performing the usual figure variation effect or the auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V), if the first kind big hit or the second kind big hit is made, the display unit 7a is kept in a special state, and the usual figure varying effect is obtained. Alternatively, the auxiliary game effect may be performed in the normal area as it is, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot game may be performed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area).

  In the first embodiment, in the normal effect mode, every time the special figure variation effect is performed 50 times without winning a big hit, the daytime normal background image G100 → the evening normal background image G102 → the night normal background The normal background image is switched in a predetermined order as image G101 → daytime normal background image G100..., Even if V is not passed in the small hit game performed by winning the small hit in the normal game state. The background image for use may be switched. Therefore, for example, when V is not passed in the small hit game performed by winning the small hit when the normal background image G100 is displayed during the daytime, the evening from the normal background image G100 in the evening at the end of the small hit game The screen is switched to the normal background image G102. And, assuming that the background image for normal use is switched in this way, in the normal effect mode, V cannot be passed in the small hit game performed by winning the small win in the special figure 1 lottery, and the end of the small hit game When the reduced screen image G10 is sometimes displayed, the normal background image may be switched in the reduced screen image G10.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the special figure 1 stop display is performed in a situation where there is no special figure 2 suspension, and the customer waiting state (the state where neither the special figure variable display nor the special game is performed: the customer waiting flag is set) Even when the camera enters the ON state, the reduced screen image G10 continues to be displayed (see FIG. 67). Here, if the normal variation effect or the auxiliary game effect is still being executed after the customer waiting effect waiting time has elapsed since entering the customer waiting state, the customer is displayed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a). It is assumed that the waiting effect is started.

  In addition, as a result of the game ball passing through the gate 28 in a situation where a waiting-for-customer effect is being performed on the display unit 7a in the normal state, when the normal symbol variation display of the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B is started, the display unit After the reduced screen image G10 is displayed on 7a (the normal area and the special area are formed on the display unit 7a), the first challenge effect is entered. Here, if the special figure 1 variable display is not performed at the start of the first challenge effect, it is assumed that the customer waiting effect is continuously performed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a).

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 in a situation where a waiting-for-customer effect is performed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a), the reduced screen image G10 (special of the display unit 7a). In the area), the special figure variation effect including the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the reduced screen image G10, the hold change notice is performed as in the case where the reduced screen image G10 is not displayed. However, while the reduced screen image G10 is displayed, the hold change is performed. The execution of the notice may be regulated. The regulation here means, for example, prohibition of a pending change notice or reduction of the execution rate.

8). Inventions Disclosed in Embodiments The following inventions A to F are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [DETAILED DESCRIPTION]. In the description of the inventions A to F, the names and expressions of the corresponding components in the embodiment for carrying out the invention described above, and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to the supplementary notes. The invention A is a generic name of the following inventions A1 to A6, the invention B is a generic name of the following inventions B1 to B8, the invention C is a generic name of the following inventions C1 to C4, and the invention D is The invention E is a generic term for the following inventions D1 to D6, the invention E is a generic term for the following inventions E1 to E7, and the invention F is a generic term for the following inventions F1 to F5.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1 is
First symbol display control means (steps S1102 to S1104 are performed, which can be stopped and displayed after the first symbol (common figure) is variably displayed when the first condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the gate 28). Game control microcomputer 81),
When a specific first symbol is stopped (hit symbol), a first specific game control means (game control microcomputer 81 performing step S1105) capable of executing a first specific game (auxiliary game) advantageous to the player;
When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the second starting port 22), the second symbol (special diagram 2) different from the first symbol is variably displayed and then stopped. Second symbol display control means (game control microcomputer 81 that performs steps S1502 to S1504),
When the specific second symbol (small winning symbol) is stopped and displayed, the second specific game control means (step S1507) capable of executing the second specific game (small winning game) advantageous to the player different from the first specific game. A gaming control microcomputer 81),
Production control means (production control microcomputer 91) capable of executing a predetermined production (Challenge production to V) across the variation display of the first symbol and the variation display of the second symbol. Gaming machine.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to the invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A1,
The first specific game includes an opening mode of a first variable winning area (second starting port 22) that can take a closing mode and an opening mode.
Unlike the first variable prize area, the second specific game is characterized by an open aspect of a second variable prize area (second big prize opening 32) that can take a closed aspect and an open aspect.

8-1-3. Invention A3
A gaming machine according to the invention A3,
A gaming machine according to invention A2,
The second condition is that the game ball passes through the first variable winning area.

8-1-4. Invention A4
A gaming machine according to the invention A4,
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions A1 to A3,
The predetermined performance is
It is performed on the display unit (display unit 7a) capable of displaying an image,
The first half effect (first half of challenge to V) performed in the first symbol variation display, and the second half representation (second half of the challenge to V) performed in the second symbol variation display and constituting the continuation of the first half effect. It is characterized by comprising.

8-1-5. Invention A5
A gaming machine according to the invention A5,
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions A1 to A4,
The predetermined performance is
A game state control means (game control microcomputer 81) that can be controlled in a normal game state or a specific game state (short time state) in which the first variable winning area is more likely to be in the open state than the normal game state;
The effect control means can execute the predetermined effect in the normal gaming state.

8-1-6. Invention A6
A gaming machine according to the invention A6,
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions A2 to A5,
When the game ball that has passed through the second variable prize area in the second specific game passes through the specific area (specific area 34), the game game is in an advantageous game state (big win game) advantageous to the player after the second specific game. Controlled,
The production control means regulates execution of the predetermined production when the first condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state.

  In addition, according to the invention A, there is an effect that the game entertainment is improved with respect to the problem A described next with respect to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-159147 as a prior art document. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-159147, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In the normal symbol variable display, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the normal symbol variation display, an auxiliary game with the opening of the variable second start port is executed. When a game ball enters the second starting port, a special symbol is variably displayed. In the special symbol variable display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the special symbol variable display, a special game with the opening of the big prize opening is executed. Here, a normal drawing effect is performed by performing a variable symbol display. In the ordinary drawing effect, when a specific symbol is stopped as a result of the ordinary drawing effect, an auxiliary game with a long opening time of the second start opening is executed. Then, during this auxiliary game, a long opening effect that suggests that the opening time is being opened is performed. In addition, every time a game ball enters the second start opening during this auxiliary game, an effect (display of the second hold icon) is performed to suggest that the ball has entered the second start opening. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the gaming fun of gaming machines that display such different symbolic variations. Then, the place made into the subject A is providing the novel game machine which a game entertainment interest improves. Invention A1 is directed to this problem A by “a production control means (a microcomputer for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production (Challenge production to V) across the variation display of the first symbol and the variation display of the second symbol”. 91) ”, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-159147 has an advantageous effect that it is possible to improve game entertainment.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to the invention B1 is
The special symbol can be variably displayed by the game ball passing through the starting area (starting ports 20, 22), and a specific display result (big hit symbol or small hit symbol) is derived in the variable symbol variable display. Then, game control means (main control board 80) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player,
Effect control means (sub control board) capable of executing variable display of effect symbols according to variable display of the special symbols in a predetermined display area (display unit 7a) when the special symbols are variably displayed. 90), and a gaming machine comprising
The game control means can execute a variable display of a normal symbol when a predetermined condition is established (a game ball passes through the gate 28), and a specific display result (winning symbol) is derived in the variable symbol normal display. Then, it is possible to execute the auxiliary game with the open state of the variable start region (second start port 22) that constitutes the start region and can take the closed state and the open state,
When the display of the normal symbol is started when the special symbol is variably displayed, the effect control means is larger than the variable display of the effect symbol in the predetermined display area. It is characterized in that a predetermined effect (ordinary pattern change effect) according to the variable display of symbols can be executed.

8-2-2. Invention B2
A gaming machine according to Invention B2
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The production control means reduces the production symbol that is variably displayed in accordance with the execution of the predetermined production.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to the invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2,
A first display area (normal area of the display unit 7a) and a second display area smaller than the first display area (special area of the display unit 7a: reduced screen image G10),
The production control means includes
When the predetermined effect is not performed, variable display of the effect symbol can be executed in the first display area,
When variable display of the normal symbol is started when the special symbol variable display is performed, the predetermined effect is performed in the first display region, and the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the first display region. It is possible to switch to the second display area.

8-2-4. Invention B4
A gaming machine according to the invention B4,
A gaming machine according to invention B3,
Special symbol display control means capable of executing variable display of special symbols (small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3) according to the variable symbol variable display in the first display area regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed. It is characterized by providing.

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to the invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B4,
The production control means includes
When the special symbol is variably displayed, a background image (such as the background images G100 to G102 in the normal effect mode) can be displayed in the predetermined display area.
As the predetermined effect is executed, the effect symbol and the background image that are variably displayed are reduced.

8-2-6. Invention B6
The gaming machine according to the invention B6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B4,
The production control means includes
When the special symbol variable display is performed, it is possible to execute an audio effect according to the effect symbol variable display,
Along with executing the predetermined effect, the effect symbol that is variably displayed can be reduced, and the sound effect corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol can be switched to the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect. It is characterized by.

8-2-7. Invention B7
A gaming machine according to the invention B7,
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B4,
The production control means includes
When the special symbol variable display is performed, it is possible to execute a light emission effect according to the variable design variable display,
Along with executing the predetermined effect, the effect symbol that is variably displayed can be reduced and the light emission effect corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol can be switched to the light emission effect corresponding to the predetermined effect. It is characterized by.

8-2-8. Invention B8
The gaming machine according to the invention B8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B4,
The production control means includes
When the special symbol is variably displayed, it is possible to execute an effect according to the variable symbol display, separately from the variable symbol variable display,
As the predetermined effect is executed, the effect symbol that is variably displayed can be reduced, and the effect corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol can be switched to the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect. And

  In addition, according to the invention B, there is an effect of improving the game interest for the problem B described next with respect to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-159147 as a prior art document. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-159147, when a game ball enters the start opening, a special symbol is variably displayed. In the special symbol variable display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the special symbol variable display, a special game with the opening of the big prize opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes the winning gate, variable display of normal symbols is performed. In the normal symbol variable display, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the normal symbol variation display, an auxiliary game is executed with the opening of the variable second starting port as the starting port. Here, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed, the special symbol lottery effect including the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in substantially the entire display area of the image display device 7. And, for example, when the normal symbol variation display is started while the special drawing lottery effect is being performed, the normal drawing effect may be started. When the general drawing effect is started, an image (box B) representing a small box appears in the display area of the image display device 7 where the special drawing lottery effect is performed. The ordinary drawing effect is an effect in which the reel L to which a plurality of types of special effect symbols are attached rotates in the box B. Then, predetermined matters (execution of an auxiliary game with a long opening time or expectation of jackpot) are suggested according to the symbol appearing from the box B when the reel L stops. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the gaming fun of gaming machines that produce effects according to such normal symbol variation display. Then, the place made into the problem B is providing the novel game machine which a game entertainment interest improves. And the invention B1 is directed to the problem B, “When the variable display of the normal symbol is started when the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the effect control means produces the effect symbol in the predetermined display area. The game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-159147, which is larger than the variable display of the above, is capable of executing a predetermined effect (common figure variation effect) according to the variable display of the normal symbol, There is an advantageous effect that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to the invention C1 is
When a predetermined condition is established (a game ball enters the start ports 20 and 22), a special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped. When a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed, a special game advantageous to the player is displayed. Is feasible,
A game machine capable of executing a variation display and a stop display of a production symbol according to a change display and a stop display of a special symbol on a display unit (display unit 7a) capable of displaying an image,
Production control means (sub-control board 90) capable of executing a specific production (a precursor production A) in a range where the production symbol is displayed on the display unit,
The effect control means regulates the specific effect when the display of the effect symbol is stopped.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to the invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The effect control means is characterized in that, when the specific effect is started when the display of the effect symbol is being changed, the effect symbol during the change display can be hidden. To do.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to the invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2,
Special symbol display control means (sub control board 90) capable of executing variation display and stop display of special symbols (small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3) different from the effect symbols according to the variation display and stop display of the special symbols. )
The special symbol display control means can perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol on the display unit regardless of whether or not the specific effect is performed.

8-3-4. Invention C4
A gaming machine according to the invention C4,
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention C1 to Invention C3,
The predetermined condition includes that the game ball passes through the start area (start ports 20, 22),
When a specific display result is derived by variable display of a normal symbol performed when a condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied, the start area is configured, and a variable start area (first state that can take a closed state and an open state) (2) game control means (main control board 80) capable of executing an auxiliary game with the open state of the starting port 22),
The production control means can execute the specific production by starting the variable display of the normal symbol.

  In addition, according to the invention C, there is an effect that the game entertainment is improved with respect to the problem C to be described next about the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-208575 as a prior art document. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208575, when a game ball enters the start opening, a special symbol is variably displayed. In the special symbol variable display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the special symbol variable display, a special game with the opening of the big prize opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes the winning gate, variable display of normal symbols is performed. In the normal symbol variable display, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the normal symbol variation display, an auxiliary game is executed with the opening of the variable second starting port as the starting port. Here, in the display area of the image display device 7, the variable display of the effect symbol according to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol change display is first performed according to the special symbol change display, and then according to the special symbol stop display, the effect symbol stop display indicating the special symbol stopped display is performed. Done. Also, when the normal symbol variation display is started, the roulette effect may be started. When the roulette effect is started, the rail image R1 appears in the range in which the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 7. However, even if the roulette effect is started during the change display of the effect symbol, the change of the effect symbol may stop when the roulette effect is being executed, and the stop display of the effect symbol may occur. In that case, the roulette effect hinders the stop display of the effect symbol, and the gaming interest is lowered. Therefore, the issue C is to provide a new gaming machine that improves the gaming interest. And the invention C1 is a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208575, in which “the effect control means regulates the specific effect when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed” with respect to the problem C. With the configuration that is not provided, there is an advantageous effect that the game entertainment can be improved.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to the invention D1 is
When the first condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the start ports 20 and 22), the first symbol (special symbol) can be displayed after being variably displayed, and can be stopped and displayed. A game control means (main control board 80) capable of executing a first specific game (special game) advantageous to the player when the jackpot symbol or the small bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed;
When the first symbol is variably displayed, on the display unit (display unit 7a) capable of displaying an image, a suggestive effect (suggested change notice) may be executed. An effect control means (sub-control board 90) capable of executing the predetermined effect after performing a pre-announcement effect),
The game control means can execute variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the gate 28). When a specific display result (winning symbol) is derived, a second specific game (auxiliary game) different from the first specific game can be executed,
The effect control means is capable of executing an effect different from the predetermined effect (normal fluctuation effect) without executing the predetermined effect after performing the suggestion effect.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to the invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention D1,
An effect different from the predetermined effect is an effect according to the variable display of the second symbol based on the establishment of the second condition,
When the second condition is satisfied when the first symbol is variably displayed, the second symbol based on the establishment of the second condition is performed without performing the predetermined effect after performing the suggestion effect. It is possible to produce an effect according to the variable display.

8-4-3. Invention D3
A gaming machine according to the invention D3,
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
The first condition is that the game ball passes through the start area (the first start port 20 and the second start port 22),
The first specific game includes an open state of a variable winning area (a first grand prize opening 30 or a second grand prize opening 32) that can be in a closed state and an open state.
The second specific game is characterized by comprising an open state of a variable start region (second start port 22) that constitutes the start region and can take a closed state and an open state.

8-4-4. Invention D4
A gaming machine according to the invention D4,
A gaming machine according to invention D3,
The predetermined effect is an effect suggesting an expectation degree that the specific first symbol is stopped and displayed.

8-4-5. Invention D5
The gaming machine according to the invention D5 is
A gaming machine according to invention D4,
The game control means includes
If the first condition is satisfied when the variable display of the first symbol cannot be started, the storage unit for storing information related to the variable display of the first symbol that cannot be started as the hold information (special figure) Holding storage unit 85),
First determination means for determining whether or not to stop display the specific first symbol based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the first symbol variation display is started (step S1603). Or the game control microcomputer 81) which performs step S1610,
Second determination means for determining whether or not the specific first symbol is to be stopped and displayed before the determination by the first determination means due to the establishment of the first condition (the microcomputer for game control performing step S211 or step S218) 81)
The production control means includes
A hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the number of the hold information can be displayed in the hold display section (hold display area 73a),
The predetermined effect can be executed using the hold display based on the determination result by the second determination means.

8-4-6. Invention D6
A gaming machine according to the invention D6,
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention D1 to Invention D5,
The production control means is characterized in that, after performing the suggestion production, it is possible to execute neither the predetermined production nor the production different from the predetermined production (ordinary drawing fluctuation production).

  In addition, according to the invention D, with respect to the problem D to be described next of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-039887 as a prior art document, the effect effect of the presentation according to the change display of the symbols is improved. The effect of doing. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-039887, when a game ball enters the start opening, a special symbol is variably displayed. In the special symbol variable display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the special symbol variable display, a special game with the opening of the big prize opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes the winning gate, variable display of normal symbols is performed. In the normal symbol variable display, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the normal symbol variation display, an auxiliary game is executed with the opening of the variable second starting port as the starting port. Here, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed, the special drawing lottery effect including the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display area of the image display device 7. And, for example, when the normal symbol variation display is started while the special drawing lottery effect is being performed, the normal drawing effect may be started. When the general drawing effect is started, a box B appears in the display area of the image display device 7 where the special drawing lottery effect is performed. Then, the reel L to which a plurality of types of special effect symbols are attached rotates in the box B, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, the special effect symbols appearing from the box B suggest a predetermined item (execution of an auxiliary game with a long opening time or expectation of jackpot). Although the game entertainment is improved by performing such a general drawing effect, the normal drawing effect is always started when the box B appears. Therefore, it is easily understood by the player that the usual drawing effect is executed when the box B appears. Then, the place made into the problem D is providing the novel game machine which the effect effect of the production | presentation according to the change display of a symbol improves. Then, the invention D1 is directed to the problem D, “If the second condition is satisfied when the first symbol is variably displayed, the effect control means does not execute the predetermined effect after performing the suggestion effect. In addition, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-039887 has a configuration that the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-039887 does not have. There is an advantageous effect that the production effect of the corresponding production can be improved.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to the invention E1 is
When the predetermined condition is established (the game ball passes through the gate 28), the symbol (ordinary symbol) is variably displayed. When a specific display result (winning symbol A) is derived by the variable display of the symbol, the symbol is closed. A game machine capable of executing an auxiliary game with the open state of a variable start region (second start port 22) that can take a state and an open state,
Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the variable start area when the auxiliary game is being executed, the predetermined effect (the second half of the challenge effect to V or the connection effect during the fluctuation of special figure 1) is executed after the passage. A gaming machine comprising an effect control means (effect control board 90) capable of executing a specific connection effect (connection effect during an auxiliary game) to be connected.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to the invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
If the game ball does not pass through the variable start area when the auxiliary game is being executed, the effect control means generates an effect corresponding to the fact that the auxiliary game does not pass (electric (Non-winning effect) can be executed.

8-5-3. Invention E3
A gaming machine according to the invention E3,
A gaming machine according to invention 1 or invention E2,
In the auxiliary game, a suggestion effect (electric chew launch promotion effect) suggesting that the variable start area is in the open state can be executed, and the game ball is started when the suggestion effect is executed. When the region is passed, the suggestion effect is switched to the specific connection effect.

8-5-4. Invention E4
A gaming machine according to the invention E4,
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions E1 to E3,
The production control means ends the specific joint production with the start of the predetermined production.

8-5-5. Invention E5
The gaming machine according to the invention E5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions E1 to E4,
The predetermined effect is executed on condition that the game ball passes through the variable start area when the auxiliary game is being executed, and the predetermined effect and the contents of the specific connection effect are related to each other. It is characterized by.

8-5-6. Invention E6
The gaming machine according to the invention E6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions E1 to E5,
In addition to the variable start region, a specific start region (first start port 20) is provided,
When the game ball passes through the specific starting area, the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed. When the game ball passes through the variable starting area, the second symbol different from the first symbol is displayed. A symbol display control means (game control microcomputer 81 for performing steps S1502 to S1504) for performing variable display of (first special symbol);
When a specific display result (big win symbol or small bonus symbol) is derived in the variable display of the first symbol or the variable display of the second symbol, a variable winning area (first large) that can take a closed state and an open state. Special game control means (game control microcomputer 81 for performing steps S1505 to S1507) capable of executing a special game with the open state of the winning opening 30 or the second grand prize opening 32);
First hold storage means (special figure 1 hold storage unit 851) for storing variable display of the first symbol that has not been started as hold information (special figure 1 hold);
Second holding storage means (special figure 2 reservation storage unit 852) for storing variable display of the second symbol that has not been started as reservation information (special figure 2 reservation),
The symbol display control means can execute the variable display of the second symbol in preference to the variable display of the first symbol,
The production control means includes
An effect (second half of the challenge to V) can be executed according to the variable display of the second design.
When the variable display of the first symbol and the auxiliary game are being executed, the game ball passes through the variable start area, and the variable display of the first symbol is performed at the end of the auxiliary game, It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a special connection effect that connects between the specific connection effect and the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second pattern (a connection effect during the special figure 1 variation).

8-5-7. Invention E7
A gaming machine according to the invention E7,
A gaming machine according to the invention E6,
If the game ball passes through the variable starting area and the variable display of the second symbol is started when the auxiliary game is performed but the variable display of the first symbol is not performed, the effect control is performed. The means is characterized in that an effect according to the variable display of the second symbol is performed without performing the specific connection effect and the special connection effect.

  In addition, according to the invention E, with respect to the problem E demonstrated next about the game machine of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-139553 as a prior art document, there exists an effect of improving a game interest. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-139553, in the gaming machine, when a game ball enters the first start port, variable display of the first special symbol is performed. In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the variable display of the first special symbol, a special game with the opening of the big prize opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes the winning gate, variable display of normal symbols is performed. In the normal symbol variable display, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the normal symbol variation display, an auxiliary game is executed with the opening of the variable second starting port as the starting port. Here, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the special drawing lottery effect including the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display area of the image display device 7. And, for example, when the normal symbol variation display is started while the special drawing lottery effect is being performed, the normal drawing effect may be started. The general drawing effect is performed together with the special drawing lottery effect in the display area of the image display device 7. In the ordinary drawing effect, when a specific symbol is stopped as a result of the ordinary drawing effect, an auxiliary game with a long opening time of the second start opening is executed. During this auxiliary game, a long opening effect is performed together with a special drawing lottery effect in the display area of the image display device 7. The long opening effect is a long opening notice effect that announces the long opening before the second opening of the second opening is performed, and a long opening time between the opening of the long opening and the end of the auxiliary game It consists of a long opening effect that suggests that there is something. In addition, during the auxiliary game, when a game ball enters the second start opening, a second special figure holding effect that suggests that the second start opening has been entered, and the second start opening is input. Each of the long-opening winning effects representing the number of prize balls for the ball is performed separately from the long-opening effects. Then, when the long opening effect ends with the end of the auxiliary game, a special effect with a different background image is performed. However, there is still room for improvement with respect to a gaming machine capable of executing an auxiliary game with the opening of the variable starting area such as the second starting port in order to improve the gaming interest. Then, the place made into the problem E is providing the novel game machine which a game entertainment interest improves. Then, the invention E1 is directed to this problem E “until a predetermined effect that is executed after the passage is executed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the variable start area when the auxiliary game is executed. The game machine described in JP 2012-139553 A has an advantageous effect that the game entertainment can be improved by providing an effect control means capable of executing a specific connection effect that connects the spaces. .

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to the invention F1 is
A variable starting region (second starting port 22) that can take a closed mode and an open mode;
A game state control means (main control board 80) that can be controlled in a normal game state or in a specific game state (time-short state) in which the variable start area is likely to be in the release mode;
A symbol display control means (main control board 80) capable of executing variable display of symbols by passing the game ball through the variable start area;
When a predetermined fixed time elapses after a specific symbol (small winning symbol) is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display control means, a specific game (small winning game) advantageous to the player is passed. Specific game control means (main control board 80) that can be executed,
The symbol display control means is characterized in that the fixed time relating to the specific symbol can be made longer in the normal gaming state than in the specific gaming state.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to the invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F1,
A variable winning area (second big prize opening 32) that can be closed and open is provided,
The specific game involves the open state of the variable winning area,
In the normal game state, notification control means for notifying that a game ball is fired toward the variable prize area after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed until the predetermined fixed time elapses. (Sub-control board 90 that performs a VAT launch promotion effect).

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to the invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F2,
The game state control means can control in the specific game state after the specific game when the game ball that has passed the variable winning area in the specific game passes the specific area (specific area 34). When the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the game is not controlled in the specific game state after the specific game.

8-6-4. Invention F4
The gaming machine according to the invention F4 is
A gaming machine according to invention F3,
A launch device (launch device 112) capable of launching a game ball in response to a player's launch operation,
In addition to the variable start region, a specific start region (first start port 20) is provided,
The design includes a first design (Special Figure 1) and a second design (Special Figure 2).
The symbol display control means includes:
When the game ball passes through the specific starting area, variable display of the first symbol can be executed,
When the game ball passes through the variable start area, the variable display of the second symbol can be executed,
The specific game control means can execute the specific game when the specific second symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the second symbol.
In the normal gaming state, the specific starting area allows the game ball to pass more easily than the variable starting area, and in the specific gaming state, the variable starting area allows the game ball to pass. Easy,
The specific starting area and the variable winning area are arranged at positions that can be distinguished by different launch operations,
The variable winning area is arranged at a position where it is not easy to pass through the variable winning area even if a game ball is fired after the specific game starts.

8-6-5. Invention F5
The gaming machine according to the invention F5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions F1 to F4,
A variable winning area (second big prize opening 32) that can be closed and open is provided,
The specific symbols include a first symbol (small hit symbol) and a second symbol (big hit symbol),
The specific game includes a first specific game (small hit game) with the open state of the variable winning area and a second specific game (big win game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game. ,
The specific game control means includes
When the first fixed time elapses after the first symbol (small winning symbol) is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display control means, the first specific game that can execute the first specific game is executed. 1 specific game control means;
When the second fixed time has elapsed after the second symbol (small winning symbol) has been stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display control means, the second specific game can be executed. 2 specific game control means,
The second specific game control means plays the second specific game after the first specific game when the game ball that has passed through the variable winning area in the first specific game passes through the specific area (specific area 34). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the first specific game, the second specific game is not executed after the first specific game,
In the normal gaming state, the specific time according to the first symbol is longer than the fixed time according to the second symbol.

  In addition, according to the invention F, there exists an effect of improving a game entertainment interest with respect to the problem F demonstrated next about the gaming machine of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-159147 as a prior art document. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-159147, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In normal symbol variable display, stop display is performed as a display result after normal symbol variation display. Here, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, an auxiliary game with a variable opening of the second starting port is executed. When a game ball enters the second starting port, a special symbol is variably displayed. In the special symbol variable display, stop display is performed as a display result after the special symbol variable display. Here, when the jackpot symbol or the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a special game with the opening of the big prize opening is executed. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-159147, the game is further controlled in a normal gaming state (low base state) or a short gaming state (high base state) when the second starting port is easier to open than in the normal gaming state. Is done. The time required for the special symbol stop display is set to be the same in the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state. However, there is still room for improvement with respect to gaming machines that can be controlled in a short-time gaming state where the variable starting area such as the second starting opening is easy to open. Then, the place made into the problem F is to provide the novel game machine which a game entertainment interest improves. Invention F1 is directed to this problem F. “The symbol display control means performs a stop display of a specific symbol for a longer time in the normal gaming state than in the specific gaming state”. With the configuration that the gaming machine described in No. 1 does not have, there is an advantageous effect that can improve the gaming interest.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 7 ... Image display apparatus 7a ... Display part 20 ... 1st starting port 22 ... 2nd starting port 23 ... Electric Chu 32 ... 2nd big winning port 33 ... 2nd big winning device 34 ... Specific area 36 ... Distribution device 80 ... main control board 81 ... game control microcomputer 82 ... CPU
83 ... ROM
84 ... RAM
91 ... Production control microcomputer 92 ... CPU
93 ... ROM
94 ... RAM
100: Image control board

Claims (1)

When the game ball wins the starting area, it is possible to stop display after the first symbol is variably displayed. When the specific first symbol is stopped, the first specific game advantageous to the player is executed. Possible game control means;
When the first symbol is variably displayed, the predetermined effect can be executed after the suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect may be executed on the display unit capable of displaying an image. A game machine comprising a certain production control means,
The starting region includes a variable starting region that can take a closed state and an open state,
The game control means can execute variable display of the second symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a specific display result is derived in the variable display, the game control means includes the second state with the open state of the variable start area. Specific games can be executed,
The production control means includes
After performing the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the second specific game is executed without executing the predetermined effect.
After notifying that the second specific game is executed in the notification effect, the second specific game is executed, and after notifying that the second specific game is not executed in the notification effect, the second 2 The specific game is not executed,
After performing the suggested effect, Ri Kotogaa which none perform the predetermined presentation and the notification effect,
The notification effect is executed in response to the end of the suggestion effect,
In the notification effect, it is derived whether or not the second specific game is executed after the common effect common to the case where the second specific game is executed and the case where the second specific game is not executed. To play.